1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format default
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command default
79 \float_placement class
80 \float_alignment class
84 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
85 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
89 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
90 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
91 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
96 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
97 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
100 \use_package amsmath 1
101 \use_package amssymb 1
102 \use_package cancel 1
104 \use_package mathdots 1
105 \use_package mathtools 1
106 \use_package mhchem 1
107 \use_package stackrel 1
108 \use_package stmaryrd 1
109 \use_package undertilde 1
111 \cite_engine_type default
115 \paperorientation portrait
122 \notefontcolor #0000ff
139 \paragraph_separation skip
142 \math_numbering_side default
143 \quotes_style english
147 \paperpagestyle default
149 \tracking_changes true
150 \output_changes false
154 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
155 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
167 by the \SpecialChar LyX
172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
174 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
175 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
176 Documentation mailing list:
177 \begin_inset CommandInset href
179 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
199 \begin_inset Note Note
202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
203 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
204 \begin_inset Newline newline
209 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
217 \begin_layout Standard
218 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
219 LatexCommand tableofcontents
226 \begin_layout Chapter
230 \begin_layout Section
231 What is \SpecialChar LyX
235 \begin_layout Standard
237 is a document preparation system.
238 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
239 scripts, publishable books, business
240 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
241 It is unlike most other
242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
249 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
251 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
267 pt type, left justified, 5
268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
277 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
281 \begin_layout Standard
282 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
287 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
291 \begin_layout Standard
296 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
297 's philosophy: most importantly,
298 the format of all of the manuals.
299 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
300 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
306 manual describes that, too.
309 \begin_layout Section
314 \begin_layout Standard
315 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
316 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
318 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
319 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
323 \begin_layout Standard
324 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
325 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
326 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
328 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
329 only a vertical scrollbar.
330 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
331 The first case is large images.
332 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
333 image and use the option
344 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
347 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
348 this doesn't work for equations yet.
351 \begin_layout Standard
352 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
353 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
361 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
368 \begin_layout Section
372 \begin_layout Standard
373 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
375 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
377 Just select the manual you want to read from the
384 \begin_layout Section
385 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
389 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
396 \begin_layout Standard
397 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
398 can be configured via the menu
400 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
404 \begin_inset Index idx
407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
414 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
417 packages are available.
418 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
420 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
422 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
427 \begin_inset space \space{}
430 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
431 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
433 To force \SpecialChar LyX
434 to re-inspect your system, you should use
436 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
440 \begin_inset Index idx
443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
444 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
450 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
451 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
454 \begin_layout Section
457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
459 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
466 \begin_layout Standard
467 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
468 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
469 installed, but you will not be
470 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
471 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
472 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
473 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
474 document can always be output as plain text
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 or DocBook classes or packages.
481 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
482 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
485 \begin_layout Standard
486 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
487 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
488 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
491 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
500 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
503 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
507 \begin_inset Index idx
510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
511 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
519 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
526 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
530 \begin_layout Chapter
531 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
535 \begin_layout Section
536 Basic File Operations
537 \begin_inset Index idx
540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
549 \begin_layout Standard
554 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
555 in addition to some more advanced operations:
558 \begin_layout Itemize
580 \begin_layout Itemize
596 arg "buffer-new-template"
602 \begin_layout Itemize
624 \begin_layout Itemize
632 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
636 \begin_layout Itemize
638 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
650 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
666 \begin_layout Itemize
668 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
676 \begin_layout Itemize
698 \begin_layout Itemize
710 arg "buffer-write-as"
714 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
718 \begin_layout Itemize
720 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
736 \begin_layout Itemize
750 \begin_layout Itemize
764 \begin_layout Standard
765 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
766 a few minor differences.
769 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
780 command lists the available templates.
781 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
782 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
783 and possibly propose text fragments
785 for the document, features
786 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
789 you would otherwise need to
790 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
792 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
796 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
800 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
808 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
814 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
815 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
819 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
827 \begin_layout Standard
828 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
860 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
861 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
862 is just that — a big, blank space.
870 \begin_layout Standard
891 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
896 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
899 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
917 will reload the document from disk.
918 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
919 and want to restore it to the last save.
928 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
929 them as your changes.
932 \begin_layout Section
933 Basic Editing Features
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
946 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
953 \begin_layout Standard
954 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
955 can perform cut and paste operations
956 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
957 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
958 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
959 editing features and how to access
961 We will start with cut and paste.
964 \begin_layout Standard
965 As you might expect, the
969 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
970 various other editing features.
971 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
975 \begin_layout Itemize
981 \begin_inset Index idx
984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1019 \begin_inset Index idx
1022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1051 \begin_layout Itemize
1057 \begin_inset Index idx
1060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1085 \begin_layout Itemize
1089 \begin_inset space ~
1095 \begin_layout Itemize
1099 \begin_inset space ~
1105 \begin_layout Itemize
1109 \begin_inset space ~
1113 \begin_inset space ~
1119 \begin_inset Index idx
1122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1131 \begin_inset Index idx
1134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1149 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1159 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1165 \begin_layout Standard
1166 The first three are self-explanatory.
1167 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1168 and other programs by
1189 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1190 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1195 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1196 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1197 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1198 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1199 into individual cells.
1203 \begin_inset space ~
1208 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1209 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1213 \begin_layout Standard
1217 \begin_inset space ~
1222 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1224 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1226 \begin_inset space ~
1233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1239 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1240 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1241 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1247 \begin_inset space \space{}
1250 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1251 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1254 \begin_inset space ~
1257 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1276 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1277 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1279 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1289 start a new paragraph.
1290 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1291 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1296 \begin_inset space ~
1299 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1305 \begin_inset space ~
1313 \begin_inset space ~
1316 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1319 paste from the primary selection.
1320 This is normally the currently selected text.
1323 \begin_layout Standard
1326 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1328 \begin_inset space ~
1332 \begin_inset space ~
1340 \begin_inset space ~
1344 \begin_inset space ~
1350 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1356 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1359 \begin_inset space ~
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1373 button to skip the current word.
1377 \begin_inset space ~
1382 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1386 \begin_inset space ~
1391 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1393 If the toggle is set, searching for
1394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1405 will not match the word
1406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1420 Match whole words only
1422 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1423 to only find complete words, e.
1424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1453 offers also an advanced
1456 \begin_inset space ~
1460 \begin_inset space ~
1465 feature that is described in section
1466 \begin_inset space ~
1470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1472 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1479 \begin_layout Standard
1480 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1481 \begin_inset space \space{}
1485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1493 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1495 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1500 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1507 \begin_layout Standard
1511 arg "inset-select-all"
1514 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1515 When the cursor is inside an inset
1518 arg "inset-select-all"
1521 selects the content of the inset.
1525 arg "inset-select-all"
1528 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1533 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1536 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1540 \begin_layout Section
1542 \begin_inset Index idx
1545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1552 \begin_inset Index idx
1555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1564 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1571 \begin_layout Standard
1572 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1574 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1577 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1580 or the toolbar button
1586 to undo some mistake.
1587 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1589 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1592 or the toolbar button
1599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1606 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1610 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1613 \begin_layout Standard
1614 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1623 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1624 This is a consequence of the 100
1625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1628 step undo limit mentioned above.
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1640 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1642 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1646 \begin_layout Section
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1661 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1664 \begin_layout Enumerate
1669 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 once anywhere in the edit window.
1675 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1679 \begin_layout Enumerate
1684 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1694 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1697 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1698 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1701 \begin_layout Itemize
1702 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1705 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 \begin_layout Enumerate
1713 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1717 \begin_layout Standard
1718 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1719 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1723 \begin_layout Section
1725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1727 name "sec:Navigating"
1732 \begin_inset Index idx
1735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1744 \begin_layout Standard
1746 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1749 \begin_layout Itemize
1754 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1755 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1758 \begin_layout Itemize
1759 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1761 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1763 \begin_inset space ~
1768 or by the toolbar button
1771 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1777 \begin_layout Itemize
1778 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1780 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1783 and use the same menu to return to them.
1784 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1787 \begin_layout Standard
1791 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1796 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1797 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1799 \begin_inset space ~
1804 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1805 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1806 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1807 your last editing position.
1810 \begin_layout Standard
1815 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1819 \begin_layout Subsection
1821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1823 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1828 \begin_inset Index idx
1831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1832 Navigating ! Outline
1838 \begin_inset Index idx
1841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1850 \begin_layout Standard
1851 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1852 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1853 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1855 \begin_inset space ~
1859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1861 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1865 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1866 \begin_inset space ~
1870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1872 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1877 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1881 \begin_layout Standard
1882 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1883 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1884 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1885 dialog and to modify the citation.
1888 \begin_layout Standard
1893 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1894 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1896 Labels and References
1898 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1907 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1910 \begin_layout Standard
1911 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1912 you further to control the display.
1917 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1918 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1924 option keeps it in the current view state.
1925 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1926 \begin_inset space ~
1929 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1930 \begin_inset space ~
1933 3, the subsections of sections
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1937 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1942 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1947 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1957 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1960 \begin_layout Standard
1967 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1968 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1982 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1983 So, for example, you can move section
1984 \begin_inset space ~
1988 \begin_inset space ~
1991 2.4 or after section
1992 \begin_inset space ~
1997 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2010 (or the corresponding key bindings
2018 ) you can change the level of sections.
2019 So you can for example make section
2020 \begin_inset space ~
2024 \begin_inset space ~
2028 \begin_inset space ~
2034 \begin_layout Standard
2035 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2036 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2039 \begin_layout Subsection
2040 Horizontal Scrolling
2041 \begin_inset Index idx
2044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2045 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2055 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2061 \begin_inset space \space{}
2065 \begin_inset space ~
2068 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2069 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2070 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2074 \begin_layout Standard
2075 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2079 \begin_layout Itemize
2081 is used on a small tablet computer
2084 \begin_layout Itemize
2085 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2097 \begin_inset space ~
2110 \begin_layout Itemize
2111 Math constructs with long command names
2114 \begin_layout Standard
2115 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2116 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2118 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2119 windows so that table
2120 \begin_inset space ~
2124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2126 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2131 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2133 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2134 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2137 \begin_layout Standard
2138 \begin_inset Float table
2145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2151 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2155 Horizontal scrolling test.
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_inset Tabular
2166 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2167 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2168 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2169 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2170 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2212 \begin_layout Section
2213 Input/Word Completion
2214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2216 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2221 \begin_inset Index idx
2224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2231 \begin_inset Index idx
2234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2265 \begin_layout Standard
2267 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2269 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2270 is used to propose completions.
2273 \begin_layout Standard
2274 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2277 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2282 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2289 \begin_inset space ~
2293 \begin_inset space ~
2298 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2302 \begin_inset space ~
2307 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2308 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2312 \begin_inset space ~
2318 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2319 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2320 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2321 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2324 \begin_layout Standard
2326 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2327 completions available.
2332 key to accept a proposed completion.
2333 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2334 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2335 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2342 \begin_layout Standard
2343 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2344 ing options for text.
2345 The special math option
2349 enables characters to be composed.
2350 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2351 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2354 , you can then input the characters
2355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2366 to a formula to get it.
2367 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2368 of the math toolbar.
2369 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2373 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2374 's installation folder.
2375 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2384 \begin_layout Section
2386 \begin_inset Index idx
2389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2396 \begin_inset Index idx
2399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2428 \begin_inset Index idx
2431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2462 \begin_layout Standard
2463 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2477 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2480 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2484 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2485 \begin_inset space ~
2489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2491 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2498 \begin_layout Standard
2502 \begin_inset space ~
2510 \begin_inset space ~
2531 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2535 \begin_layout Labeling
2536 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2540 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2541 LatexCommand nomenclature
2543 description "Tabulator key"
2550 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2552 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2559 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2566 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2570 , especially section
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2577 reference "subsec:Lists"
2583 If you are still confused, look in the
2588 \begin_inset Newline newline
2596 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2597 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2601 \begin_layout Labeling
2602 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2606 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2607 LatexCommand nomenclature
2609 description "Escape key"
2617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2624 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2625 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2628 \begin_layout Labeling
2629 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2635 \begin_inset space ~
2639 \begin_inset space ~
2646 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2647 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2651 \begin_layout Standard
2652 There are three modifier keys:
2655 \begin_layout Labeling
2656 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2674 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2675 LatexCommand nomenclature
2677 description "Control key"
2682 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2683 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2687 \begin_layout Itemize
2696 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2699 \begin_layout Itemize
2708 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2711 \begin_layout Itemize
2720 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2724 \begin_layout Labeling
2725 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2743 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2744 LatexCommand nomenclature
2746 description "Shift key"
2751 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2752 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2755 \begin_layout Labeling
2756 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2774 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2775 LatexCommand nomenclature
2777 description "Alt or Meta key"
2782 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2783 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2784 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2790 \begin_inset Newline newline
2793 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2795 menu accelerator keys
2798 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2799 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2803 \begin_layout Standard
2804 For example, the sequence
2805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2811 \begin_inset space ~
2815 \begin_inset space ~
2821 \begin_inset space ~
2829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2848 \begin_inset space ~
2854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2864 \begin_layout Standard
2869 manual lists all other things bound to the
2877 \begin_layout Standard
2878 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2880 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2881 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2882 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2883 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2884 The \SpecialChar LyX
2885 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2886 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2887 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2889 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2905 followed by a capital
2912 \begin_layout Chapter
2915 \begin_inset Index idx
2918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2928 \begin_layout Section
2930 \begin_inset Index idx
2933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2942 \begin_layout Subsection
2946 \begin_layout Standard
2947 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2948 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2949 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2950 numbering schemes, and so on.
2951 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2952 and format the title of your document differently.
2955 \begin_layout Standard
2960 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2961 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2962 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2963 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2964 picks one for you by default.
2965 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2968 \begin_layout Subsection
2970 \begin_inset Index idx
2973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2982 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2989 \begin_layout Standard
2990 You can select a class using the
2992 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2993 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2997 \begin_inset Index idx
3000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3007 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3011 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3015 \begin_layout Standard
3016 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3021 \begin_layout Description
3022 Article for basic articles
3025 \begin_layout Description
3026 Report for basic reports
3029 \begin_layout Description
3030 Book for writing a book
3033 \begin_layout Description
3034 Letter for US-style letters
3037 \begin_layout Standard
3038 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3039 only uses if you have installed
3040 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 distributions will include
3044 Here are some of the classes.
3045 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3047 Special Document Classes
3056 \begin_layout Description
3057 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3060 \begin_layout Description
3061 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3065 \begin_layout Description
3066 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3070 \begin_layout Description
3071 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3072 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3073 There are three article layouts available.
3074 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3075 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3076 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3077 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3082 sequential numbering
3083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3086 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3087 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3088 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3089 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3092 \begin_layout Description
3093 Beamer Layout for presentations
3096 \begin_layout Description
3097 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3098 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3099 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3100 with \SpecialChar LyX
3104 \begin_layout Description
3105 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3108 \begin_layout Description
3110 \begin_inset space ~
3113 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3116 \begin_layout Description
3117 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3120 \begin_layout Description
3121 Foils Used to make transparencies
3124 \begin_layout Description
3125 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3126 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3127 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3128 with \SpecialChar LyX
3132 \begin_layout Description
3133 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3134 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3137 \begin_layout Description
3138 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3141 \begin_layout Description
3142 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3145 \begin_layout Description
3146 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3147 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3148 (Is used by this document.)
3151 \begin_layout Description
3152 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3155 \begin_layout Description
3156 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3159 \begin_layout Description
3164 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3165 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3167 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3171 \begin_layout Description
3172 Slides Used to make transparencies
3175 \begin_layout Description
3177 \begin_inset space ~
3180 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3181 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3184 \begin_layout Description
3185 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3188 \begin_layout Standard
3189 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3191 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3193 Special Document Classes
3200 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3201 of the document classes.
3204 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3208 \begin_layout Standard
3209 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3211 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3212 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3214 \begin_inset Index idx
3217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3234 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3235 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3237 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3240 \begin_layout Standard
3243 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3248 , are highly specialized.
3250 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3251 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3252 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3253 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3254 by some document class.
3255 There are just too many of them.
3256 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3259 \begin_layout Standard
3260 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3268 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3269 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3270 document class for a new file.
3272 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3275 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3282 manual for information on how to install them.
3283 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3289 \begin_layout Standard
3290 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3291 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3292 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3293 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3294 class files to be used for dissertation
3295 s submitted to those universities.
3296 The \SpecialChar LyX
3297 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3299 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3303 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3309 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3316 name "subsec:Modules"
3321 \begin_inset Index idx
3324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3333 \begin_layout Standard
3334 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3335 chosen document class.
3336 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3337 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3344 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3348 \begin_inset Index idx
3351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3358 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3362 \begin_layout Standard
3363 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3364 packages or file format converters that are not always
3365 installed by default.
3367 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3368 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3369 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3370 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3372 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3373 file without the missing prerequisites.
3374 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3375 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3378 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3382 \begin_inset Index idx
3385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3386 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3392 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3397 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3400 \begin_layout Standard
3401 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3409 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3411 will advise you about these things.
3419 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3423 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3428 \begin_inset Index idx
3431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3432 Document ! Local Layout
3440 \begin_layout Standard
3441 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3442 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3443 : They are intended to be used in
3444 a variety of different documents.
3445 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3446 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3447 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3448 need a specific inset or
3449 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3451 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3454 style only that one time.
3455 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3457 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3475 manual for information on how to use it.
3478 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3482 \begin_layout Standard
3483 Each class has a default set of options.
3484 Here's a quick table describing them:
3487 \begin_layout Standard
3488 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3494 \begin_layout Standard
3496 \begin_inset Tabular
3497 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3498 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3499 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3500 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3501 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3502 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3503 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3957 \begin_layout Standard
3958 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3964 \begin_layout Standard
3965 You're probably also wondering what
3966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3970 \begin_inset space ~
3974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3978 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3979 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3984 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3989 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3999 headings, there are also
4007 headings, and so on.
4008 We will describe these headings fully in section
4009 \begin_inset space ~
4013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4015 reference "subsec:Headings"
4022 \begin_layout Subsection
4024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4026 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4031 \begin_inset Index idx
4034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4041 \begin_inset Index idx
4044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4053 \begin_layout Standard
4054 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4056 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4063 \begin_inset space ~
4071 \begin_inset space ~
4076 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4078 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4079 doesn't support special options you want to
4080 use for your document.
4081 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4082 -class and its options, you have to read
4086 \begin_layout Standard
4090 \begin_inset space ~
4097 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4103 \begin_inset space ~
4108 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4109 You can choose between the following five options:
4112 \begin_layout Labeling
4113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4118 Use default page style of current class.
4121 \begin_layout Labeling
4122 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4127 No page numbers or headings.
4130 \begin_layout Labeling
4131 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4139 \begin_layout Labeling
4140 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4145 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4146 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4147 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4148 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4151 \begin_layout Labeling
4152 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4157 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4158 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4164 \begin_inset Index idx
4167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4175 How they are defined is explained in section
4176 \begin_inset space ~
4180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4182 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4189 \begin_layout Standard
4190 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4191 \begin_inset space ~
4195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4197 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4204 \begin_layout Subsection
4205 Paper Size and Orientation
4206 \begin_inset Index idx
4209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4210 Document ! Paper size
4216 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4218 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4225 \begin_layout Standard
4226 You can find the following options in the menu
4229 \begin_inset space ~
4236 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4240 \begin_inset Index idx
4243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4252 \begin_layout Labeling
4253 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4257 \begin_inset space ~
4262 What size paper to print on.
4267 \begin_layout Itemize
4273 \begin_layout Itemize
4279 \begin_layout Itemize
4285 \begin_layout Itemize
4291 \begin_layout Itemize
4294 US letter, US legal, US executive
4297 \begin_layout Itemize
4303 \begin_layout Itemize
4310 \begin_layout Labeling
4311 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4316 To choose whether to output as
4327 \begin_layout Labeling
4328 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4332 \begin_inset space ~
4337 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4338 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4341 \begin_layout Subsection
4343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4345 name "subsec:Margins"
4350 \begin_inset Index idx
4353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4360 \begin_inset Index idx
4363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4372 \begin_layout Standard
4373 Paper margins are set in the menu
4375 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4379 \begin_inset Index idx
4382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4391 \begin_layout Standard
4392 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4393 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4394 the paper format and the font size into account.
4397 \begin_layout Subsection
4401 \begin_layout Standard
4402 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4408 That includes the paragraph environments.
4409 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4410 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4411 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4413 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4422 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4424 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4425 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4426 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4429 \begin_layout Section
4430 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4431 \begin_inset Index idx
4434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4435 Paragraph ! Indentation
4443 \begin_layout Subsection
4445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4447 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4454 \begin_layout Standard
4455 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4456 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4459 \begin_layout Standard
4460 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4461 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4462 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4463 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4467 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4473 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4474 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4475 language than English.
4477 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4480 \begin_layout Standard
4481 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4482 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4483 into \SpecialChar LyX
4485 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4488 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4490 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4491 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4492 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4499 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4500 goes to produce a printable file.
4505 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4507 gives you the ability globally to change
4511 these pre-coded spacings.
4512 We will explain more later.
4515 \begin_layout Subsection
4516 Paragraph Separation
4517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4519 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4524 \begin_inset Index idx
4527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4528 Paragraph ! Separation
4536 \begin_layout Standard
4544 \begin_inset space ~
4552 \begin_inset space ~
4559 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4563 \begin_inset Index idx
4566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4572 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4575 \begin_layout Subsection
4579 \begin_layout Standard
4580 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4583 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4585 \begin_inset space ~
4590 dialog and toggle the
4593 \begin_inset space ~
4598 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4601 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4605 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4606 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4610 \begin_layout Standard
4611 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4612 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4615 \begin_layout Subsection
4617 \begin_inset Index idx
4620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4621 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4629 \begin_layout Standard
4632 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4636 \begin_inset Index idx
4639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4648 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4652 \begin_inset space ~
4661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4662 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 \begin_inset Index idx
4671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4678 installed to use this feature.
4683 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4685 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4687 \begin_inset space ~
4692 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4693 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4696 \begin_layout Section
4697 Paragraph Environments
4698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4700 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4705 \begin_inset Index idx
4708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4709 Paragraph ! Environments
4715 \begin_inset Index idx
4718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4719 Paragraph environments|(
4727 \begin_layout Subsection
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4732 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4735 \begin_layout Standard
4744 } \SpecialChar ldots
4754 \begin_inset Newline newline
4757 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4759 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4760 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4761 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4770 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4773 \begin_layout Standard
4774 A paragraph environment is simply a
4775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4782 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4783 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4784 scheme, labels, and so on.
4785 Additionally, you can
4786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4793 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4794 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4795 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4796 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4798 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4800 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4803 \begin_layout Standard
4804 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4805 \begin_inset Graphics
4806 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4812 at the left end of the toolbar.
4814 will change the environment of the
4818 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4819 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4820 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4824 \begin_layout Standard
4833 create a new paragraph using the
4837 paragraph environment.
4839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4846 because if you are in one of these environments:
4849 \begin_layout Itemize
4855 \begin_layout Itemize
4861 \begin_layout Itemize
4867 \begin_layout Itemize
4873 \begin_layout Itemize
4879 \begin_layout Itemize
4885 \begin_layout Itemize
4891 \begin_layout Standard
4893 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4897 , rather than resetting it to
4902 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4903 \begin_inset space ~
4907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4909 reference "sec:Nesting"
4916 \begin_layout Subsection
4920 \begin_layout Standard
4921 The default paragraph environment is
4926 It creates a plain paragraph.
4928 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4929 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4930 this manual) are in the
4937 \begin_layout Standard
4938 You can nest a paragraph using the
4942 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4950 \begin_layout Subsection
4952 \begin_inset Index idx
4955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4964 \begin_layout Standard
4965 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4966 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4975 for thanks or contact information.
4976 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4977 places all of this on a separate page
4978 along with today's date.
4979 For other types of documents, the title
4980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4987 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4991 \begin_layout Standard
4993 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5007 Here's how you use them:
5010 \begin_layout Itemize
5011 Put the title of your document in the
5018 \begin_layout Itemize
5019 Put the author name in the
5026 \begin_layout Itemize
5027 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5028 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5034 Note that using this environment is optional.
5035 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5036 will automatically insert today's date.
5037 If you don't want a date, use the option
5039 Suppress default date on front page
5043 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5044 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5046 \begin_inset space ~
5054 \begin_layout Standard
5055 You can use footnotes to insert
5056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5063 or contact information.
5066 \begin_layout Subsection
5068 \begin_inset Index idx
5071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5080 name "subsec:Headings"
5087 \begin_layout Standard
5088 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5090 takes care of the numbering for you.
5093 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5095 \begin_inset Index idx
5098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5099 Section headings ! Numbered
5107 \begin_layout Standard
5108 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5112 \begin_layout Enumerate
5118 \begin_layout Enumerate
5124 \begin_layout Enumerate
5130 \begin_layout Enumerate
5136 \begin_layout Enumerate
5142 \begin_layout Enumerate
5148 \begin_layout Enumerate
5154 \begin_layout Standard
5156 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5157 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5158 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5161 \begin_layout Standard
5162 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5163 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5164 You group the book into chapters.
5166 does a similar grouping:
5169 \begin_layout Itemize
5174 is divided into either
5185 \begin_layout Itemize
5197 \begin_layout Itemize
5209 \begin_layout Itemize
5221 \begin_layout Itemize
5233 \begin_layout Itemize
5245 \begin_layout Standard
5246 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5254 Not all document types use the
5258 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5263 is the top-level heading.
5271 \begin_layout Standard
5276 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5277 labels it with its number,
5278 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5280 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5292 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5294 \begin_inset Index idx
5297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5298 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5306 \begin_layout Standard
5307 The unnumbered section headings have a
5308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5315 at the end of their name.
5316 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5317 the table of contents, see section
5318 \begin_inset space ~
5322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5331 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5332 Changing the Numbering
5333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5335 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5342 \begin_layout Standard
5343 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5344 in the Table of Contents.
5345 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5347 Just as certain classes start with
5361 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5371 This is something you can change.
5374 \begin_layout Standard
5377 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5381 \begin_inset Index idx
5384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5393 \begin_inset space ~
5397 \begin_inset space ~
5402 you will see two counters.
5407 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5408 numbers a section heading.
5409 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5413 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5414 Short Titles of Headings
5415 \begin_inset Index idx
5418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5419 Section headings ! Short titles
5425 \begin_inset Argument 1
5428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5437 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5444 \begin_layout Standard
5445 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5446 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5447 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5448 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5451 \begin_layout Standard
5453 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5454 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5455 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5456 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5459 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5461 \begin_inset space ~
5467 This will insert a box labeled
5468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5472 \begin_inset space ~
5476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5479 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5480 This also works for captions inside floats.
5481 There can only be one short title per title.
5484 \begin_layout Standard
5485 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5488 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5492 \begin_layout Standard
5493 The following information applies to all section headings:
5496 \begin_layout Itemize
5497 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5500 \begin_layout Itemize
5501 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5504 \begin_layout Itemize
5505 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5508 \begin_layout Itemize
5509 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5512 \begin_layout Subsection
5516 \begin_layout Standard
5518 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5532 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5533 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5534 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5535 the text they contain.
5536 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5544 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5547 \begin_layout Standard
5548 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5557 when you start a new paragraph.
5558 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5562 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5563 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5564 have to change back to the
5568 environment yourself.
5571 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5573 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5580 \begin_inset Index idx
5583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5592 \begin_layout Standard
5593 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5594 time for the differences.
5603 are identical except for one difference:
5607 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5616 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5619 \begin_layout Standard
5620 Here's an example of the
5633 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5635 See – no indentation!
5639 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5640 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5641 the other paragraph.
5644 \begin_layout Standard
5645 Here's another example, this time in the
5652 \begin_layout Quotation
5658 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5659 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5660 the first line, then
5664 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5668 you were quoting other text.
5671 \begin_layout Quotation
5672 Here's a new paragraph.
5673 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5674 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5677 \begin_layout Standard
5678 As the examples show,
5682 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5683 They should put quotes in the
5688 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5692 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5697 \begin_inset Index idx
5700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5707 \begin_inset Index idx
5710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5726 \begin_layout Standard
5731 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5737 \begin_inset Newline newline
5740 Which I did not rehearse!
5744 It could be much worse.
5745 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5747 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5748 indented a bit more than the first.
5749 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5755 \begin_inset Newline newline
5758 And make things look fine
5759 \begin_inset Newline newline
5765 arg "newline-insert newline"
5771 \begin_layout Standard
5776 does not indent both margins.
5777 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5778 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5781 arg "newline-insert newline"
5787 \begin_layout Subsection
5789 \begin_inset Index idx
5792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5808 \begin_layout Standard
5810 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5820 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5821 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5830 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5831 lets you provide your own label.
5832 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5833 describing some general features of all four of them.
5836 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5840 \begin_layout Standard
5841 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5843 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5844 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5853 reset the environment to
5857 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5858 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5859 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5863 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5867 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5874 \begin_layout Standard
5875 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5876 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5877 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5879 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5880 you read all of section
5881 \begin_inset space ~
5885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5887 reference "sec:Nesting"
5894 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5896 \begin_inset Index idx
5899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5906 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5915 \begin_layout Standard
5916 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5920 paragraph environment.
5921 It has the following properties:
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5931 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5939 \begin_layout Itemize
5940 The items can have any length.
5942 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5943 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5950 \begin_layout Itemize
5955 environment inside another
5959 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5963 \begin_layout Itemize
5964 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5967 \begin_layout Itemize
5969 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5972 \begin_layout Itemize
5974 \begin_inset space ~
5978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5980 reference "sec:Nesting"
5984 for a full explanation of nesting.
5988 \begin_layout Standard
5989 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5998 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6001 \begin_layout Standard
6002 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6003 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6006 \begin_layout Itemize
6007 The label for the first level
6011 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6015 \begin_layout Itemize
6016 The label for the second level is a dash.
6020 \begin_layout Itemize
6021 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6025 \begin_layout Itemize
6026 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6030 \begin_layout Itemize
6031 Back out to the third level.
6035 \begin_layout Itemize
6036 Back to the second level.
6040 \begin_layout Itemize
6041 Back to the outermost level.
6044 \begin_layout Standard
6045 These are the default labels for an
6050 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6052 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6055 dialog in the submenu
6060 \begin_inset Index idx
6063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6069 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6073 \begin_layout Standard
6074 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6075 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6077 \begin_inset space ~
6081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6083 reference "sec:Nesting"
6090 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6092 \begin_inset Index idx
6095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6104 name "sec:Enumerate"
6111 \begin_layout Standard
6116 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6117 It has these properties:
6120 \begin_layout Enumerate
6121 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6125 \begin_layout Enumerate
6126 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6130 \begin_layout Enumerate
6132 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6135 \begin_layout Enumerate
6140 environment resets the counter to one.
6143 \begin_layout Enumerate
6156 \begin_layout Enumerate
6157 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6158 Items can have any length.
6161 \begin_layout Enumerate
6162 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6165 \begin_layout Enumerate
6166 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6169 \begin_layout Enumerate
6170 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6174 \begin_layout Standard
6183 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6185 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6186 labels the four different levels in an
6193 \begin_layout Enumerate
6194 The first level of an
6198 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6202 \begin_layout Enumerate
6203 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6207 \begin_layout Enumerate
6208 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6212 \begin_layout Enumerate
6213 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6216 \begin_layout Enumerate
6217 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6222 \begin_layout Enumerate
6223 Back to the third level
6227 \begin_layout Enumerate
6228 Back to the second level.
6232 \begin_layout Enumerate
6233 Back to the outermost level.
6236 \begin_layout Standard
6237 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6241 environment, see section
6242 \begin_inset space ~
6246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6248 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6253 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6257 \begin_layout Standard
6258 There is more to nesting
6262 environments than we've stated here.
6263 You should read section
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6270 reference "sec:Nesting"
6274 to learn more about nesting.
6277 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6279 \begin_inset Index idx
6282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6291 \begin_layout Standard
6292 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6296 list has no fixed label.
6297 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6306 of the first line as the label.
6310 \begin_layout Description
6311 Example: This is an example of the
6318 \begin_layout Standard
6320 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6324 \begin_layout Standard
6326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6333 it is meant that the first usage of the
6337 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6339 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6347 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6352 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6353 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6355 \begin_inset space ~
6361 \begin_inset space ~
6365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6367 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6371 for more information.) Here is an example:
6374 \begin_layout Description
6376 \begin_inset space ~
6379 Example: This one shows how to use a
6382 \begin_inset space ~
6394 \begin_layout Description
6395 Usage: You should use the
6399 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6400 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6402 It's not a good idea to use a
6406 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6407 You're better off using
6419 paragraphs into them.
6422 \begin_layout Description
6423 Nesting: You can nest
6427 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6431 \begin_layout Standard
6432 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6433 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6434 them from the first line.
6437 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6439 \begin_inset Index idx
6442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6451 \begin_layout Standard
6456 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6457 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6461 \begin_layout Standard
6470 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6472 Here are its properties:
6475 \begin_layout Labeling
6476 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6478 \begin_inset space ~
6481 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6490 of each line as the item label.
6495 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6496 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6497 space as described above.
6500 \begin_layout Labeling
6501 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6502 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6503 uses different margins for the item label and the
6504 body of the item text.
6505 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6506 label width plus a little extra space.
6510 \begin_layout Labeling
6511 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6513 \begin_inset space ~
6516 width \SpecialChar LyX
6517 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6518 If the label width is larger, the label
6519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6526 into the first line.
6527 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6528 margin of the rest of the item text.
6531 \begin_layout Labeling
6532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6534 \begin_inset space ~
6537 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6542 environment has the same left margin.
6543 \begin_inset Newline newline
6546 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6549 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6551 \begin_inset space ~
6556 dialog (toolbar button
6559 arg "layout-paragraph"
6566 \begin_inset space ~
6571 determines the default label width.
6572 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6581 multiple times instead.
6582 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6592 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6595 \begin_inset space ~
6600 every time you alter a label in a
6605 \begin_inset Newline newline
6608 The predefined default width is the length of
6609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6617 \begin_inset space ~
6623 \begin_layout Standard
6628 list the same way as the
6632 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6638 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6642 \begin_layout Standard
6647 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6648 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6650 \begin_inset space ~
6654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6656 reference "sec:Nesting"
6660 to learn about nesting.
6663 \begin_layout Standard
6664 There is yet another feature of the
6668 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6669 left-justifies the item labels by
6671 You can use additional
6675 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6676 justifies the item label.
6681 are documented in section
6682 \begin_inset space ~
6686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6688 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6693 Here are some examples:
6696 \begin_layout Labeling
6697 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6698 Left The default for
6705 \begin_layout Labeling
6706 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6707 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6714 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6717 \begin_layout Labeling
6718 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6719 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6723 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6730 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6733 \begin_layout Subsection
6735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6737 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6742 \begin_inset Index idx
6745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6754 \begin_layout Standard
6755 The features described in this section require that the module
6757 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6759 is loaded in the document settings.
6760 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6766 \begin_inset Index idx
6769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6779 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6780 Custom Enumerate Lists
6781 \begin_inset Index idx
6784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6785 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6793 \begin_layout Standard
6795 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6798 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6801 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6802 There you add the command
6805 \begin_layout Standard
6813 \begin_layout Standard
6825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6826 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6827 Code, look at section
6828 \begin_inset space ~
6832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6834 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6847 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6854 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6855 For capital Roman numerals replace
6867 in the command above.
6868 For Arabic numerals use
6876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6883 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6898 \begin_layout Standard
6900 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 You can only number 26
6909 \begin_inset space ~
6912 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6920 \begin_layout Standard
6921 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6922 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6925 \begin_layout Standard
6926 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6929 \begin_layout Enumerate
6930 \begin_inset Argument 1
6933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6959 \begin_layout Enumerate
6960 \begin_inset Argument 1
6963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6986 \begin_layout Enumerate
6991 \begin_layout Enumerate
6992 \begin_inset Argument 1
6995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7019 \begin_layout Enumerate
7020 \begin_inset Argument 1
7023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7049 \begin_layout Standard
7050 For this list these commands were used:
7053 \begin_layout Standard
7064 \begin_inset Newline newline
7072 \begin_inset Newline newline
7080 \begin_inset Newline newline
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7097 makes the label emphasized and
7106 \begin_layout Standard
7107 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7115 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7116 lists until you change the definition.
7124 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7126 \begin_inset Index idx
7129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7130 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7138 \begin_layout Standard
7139 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7142 \begin_layout Enumerate
7143 \begin_inset Argument 1
7146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7165 \begin_inset Note Note
7168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7169 goes back to default numbering
7177 \begin_layout Enumerate
7181 \begin_layout Standard
7185 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7189 \begin_layout Standard
7190 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7195 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7196 to indicate that it is a resumed
7197 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7198 , but in the output.
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7210 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7219 \begin_layout Standard
7220 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7222 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7223 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7224 of a normal enumeration.
7225 There, insert the command
7228 \begin_layout Standard
7234 \begin_layout Standard
7239 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7243 \begin_layout Enumerate
7247 \begin_layout Enumerate
7251 \begin_layout Standard
7252 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7255 \begin_layout Enumerate
7256 \begin_inset Argument 1
7259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7275 This enumeration starts at 4
7278 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7280 \begin_inset Index idx
7283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7292 \begin_layout Standard
7293 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7295 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7298 \begin_layout Itemize
7302 \begin_layout Itemize
7303 with standard spacing
7306 \begin_layout Standard
7307 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7309 Add there the command
7313 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7316 \begin_layout Itemize
7317 \begin_inset Argument 1
7320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7339 \begin_layout Itemize
7343 \begin_layout Itemize
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7348 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7355 \begin_inset Index idx
7358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7366 For more information see its documentation,
7367 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7378 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7380 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7381 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7385 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7388 \begin_layout Enumerate
7389 \begin_inset Argument 1
7392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7400 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7413 \begin_layout Enumerate
7414 with negative indentation
7417 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7418 Further Customization
7419 \begin_inset Index idx
7422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7423 Lists ! Customization
7431 \begin_layout Standard
7432 You can also change the style of description lists.
7436 \begin_layout Standard
7442 \begin_layout Standard
7443 changes the description label font, the command
7446 \begin_layout Standard
7452 \begin_layout Standard
7453 sets the list style.
7456 \begin_layout Standard
7457 An example where the command
7460 \begin_layout Standard
7465 itshape, style=nextline
7468 \begin_layout Standard
7472 \begin_layout Description
7474 \begin_inset space ~
7478 \begin_inset Argument 1
7481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7487 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7489 itshape, style=nextline
7499 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7500 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7504 \begin_layout Description
7506 \begin_inset space ~
7509 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7510 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7511 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7514 \begin_layout Standard
7515 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7521 \begin_inset Index idx
7524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7532 For more information see its documentation
7533 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7543 \begin_layout Subsection
7545 \begin_inset Index idx
7548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7557 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7559 \begin_inset space ~
7562 Address: An Overview
7565 \begin_layout Standard
7566 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7567 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7575 \begin_inset space ~
7581 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7582 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7583 gags on the document.
7584 In contrast, you can use the
7591 \begin_inset space ~
7596 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7597 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7601 \begin_layout Standard
7602 Of course, you're not limited to using
7609 \begin_inset space ~
7618 \begin_inset space ~
7623 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7624 some European academic papers.
7627 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7631 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7638 \begin_layout Standard
7643 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7644 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7648 \begin_inset space ~
7653 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7654 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7655 Here's an example of each:
7658 \begin_layout Right Address
7660 \begin_inset Newline newline
7664 \begin_inset Newline newline
7668 \begin_inset Newline newline
7671 When is it? What is today?
7674 \begin_layout Standard
7678 \begin_inset space ~
7684 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7686 the largest block of text on a single line.
7687 Here's an example of the
7694 \begin_layout Address
7696 \begin_inset Newline newline
7699 Where do I send this
7700 \begin_inset Newline newline
7703 Your post office and country
7706 \begin_layout Standard
7707 As you can see, both
7714 \begin_inset space ~
7719 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7724 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7725 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7731 This makes sense, since
7739 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7740 Thus, you have to use
7747 arg "newline-insert newline"
7752 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7753 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7755 \begin_inset space ~
7759 \begin_inset space ~
7764 ) to start a new line in an
7771 \begin_inset space ~
7779 \begin_layout Subsection
7783 \begin_layout Standard
7784 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7785 or list of references.
7787 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7790 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7792 \begin_inset Index idx
7795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 \begin_layout Standard
7809 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7810 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7811 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7812 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7826 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7827 The book document classes ignores the
7831 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7835 in a letter document class.
7838 \begin_layout Standard
7843 environment does several things for you.
7844 First, it puts the centered label
7845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7853 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7855 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7856 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7857 the subsequent text.
7858 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7860 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7864 \begin_layout Standard
7865 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7869 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7870 The new paragraph will still be in the
7875 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7876 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7879 \begin_layout Standard
7880 \begin_inset Float figure
7887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7889 \begin_inset Graphics
7890 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7898 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7903 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7924 \begin_layout Standard
7925 We would love to demonstrate the
7929 environment, but since this document is in the
7930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7937 class, we can't do this.
7938 We inserted it therefore as figure
7939 \begin_inset space ~
7943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7945 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7950 If you have never heard of an
7951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7958 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7963 \begin_inset Index idx
7966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7975 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7982 \begin_layout Standard
7987 environment is used to list references.
7988 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7989 only use it at the end of the document.
8001 \begin_layout Standard
8002 When you first open a
8006 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8007 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8023 depending on the document class.
8024 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8025 Each paragraph of the
8029 environment is a bibliography entry.
8034 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8035 Each new paragraph is still in the
8042 \begin_layout Standard
8043 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8044 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8046 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8048 handling, have a look at section
8049 \begin_inset space ~
8053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8055 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8062 \begin_layout Subsection
8063 Special Environments
8066 \begin_layout Standard
8068 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8069 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8077 \begin_inset Index idx
8080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8090 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8097 \begin_layout Standard
8103 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8105 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8110 key as a fixed whitespace.
8114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8127 \begin_inset space ~
8132 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8150 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8153 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8156 arg "newline-insert newline"
8173 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8174 So, when you finish using the
8179 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8180 Also, you can nest the
8185 environment inside of others.
8188 \begin_layout Standard
8189 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8192 \begin_layout Itemize
8196 arg "newline-insert newline"
8199 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8204 \begin_inset space \space{}
8214 arg "newline-insert newline"
8220 \begin_layout Itemize
8224 arg "newline-insert newline"
8234 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8240 \begin_layout Itemize
8241 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8242 You must put at least one
8246 in any line you want blank.
8247 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8251 \begin_layout Itemize
8252 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8256 since that will insert
8261 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8264 arg "self-insert \""
8270 \begin_layout Standard
8274 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8278 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8282 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8286 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8290 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8291 printf("Hello World!
8296 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8300 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8304 \begin_layout Standard
8305 This is just the standard
8306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8317 \begin_layout Standard
8323 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8325 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8326 as if you used a typewriter.
8327 \begin_inset Index idx
8330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8331 Paragraph environments|)
8336 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8339 Program Code Listings
8344 \begin_inset space ~
8352 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8356 \begin_inset Index idx
8359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8368 \begin_layout Standard
8373 environment is similar to the
8378 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8379 computer console text.
8384 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8398 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8399 you can have empty lines.
8412 \begin_layout Itemize
8413 have a certain language and a text style
8416 \begin_layout Itemize
8417 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8418 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8419 and \SpecialChar TeX
8423 \begin_layout Standard
8424 Because of these properties
8428 works like a typewriter.
8432 \begin_layout Verbatim
8437 \begin_layout Verbatim
8441 The following 2 lines are empty:
8444 \begin_layout Verbatim
8448 \begin_layout Verbatim
8452 \begin_layout Verbatim
8454 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8459 \begin_layout Standard
8464 environment is identical to
8468 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8469 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8476 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8481 \begin_layout Section
8482 Nesting Environments
8483 \begin_inset Index idx
8486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8487 Nesting ! Environments
8493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8502 \begin_layout Subsection
8506 \begin_layout Standard
8508 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8510 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8512 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8514 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8526 \begin_layout Enumerate
8530 \begin_layout Enumerate
8535 \begin_layout Enumerate
8539 \begin_layout Enumerate
8544 \begin_layout Enumerate
8548 \begin_layout Standard
8549 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8550 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8552 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8554 \begin_inset space ~
8558 \begin_inset space ~
8566 \begin_inset space ~
8570 \begin_inset space ~
8575 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8577 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8580 arg "depth-increment"
8586 arg "depth-decrement"
8600 arg "depth-increment"
8606 arg "depth-decrement"
8610 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8611 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8615 \begin_layout Standard
8616 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8617 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8618 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8619 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8620 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8623 \begin_layout Standard
8624 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8626 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8628 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8631 \begin_layout Subsection
8632 What You Can and Can't Nest
8635 \begin_layout Standard
8636 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8637 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8640 \begin_layout Standard
8641 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8642 than a simple yes or no.
8643 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8646 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 Completely unnestable
8650 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8655 \begin_layout Itemize
8656 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8660 \begin_layout Standard
8661 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8662 environments have them:
8665 \begin_layout Description
8666 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8667 Can't nest into them.
8671 \begin_layout Itemize
8677 \begin_layout Itemize
8683 \begin_layout Itemize
8689 \begin_layout Itemize
8695 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 \begin_layout Description
8704 \begin_inset space ~
8707 Nestable You can nest them.
8708 You can nest other things into them.
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8754 \begin_layout Itemize
8761 \begin_layout Itemize
8767 \begin_layout Itemize
8774 \begin_layout Description
8775 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8776 You can't nest anything into them.
8780 \begin_layout Itemize
8786 \begin_layout Itemize
8792 \begin_layout Itemize
8798 \begin_layout Itemize
8804 \begin_layout Itemize
8810 \begin_layout Itemize
8816 \begin_layout Itemize
8822 \begin_layout Itemize
8828 \begin_layout Itemize
8834 \begin_layout Itemize
8840 \begin_layout Itemize
8846 \begin_layout Itemize
8852 \begin_layout Itemize
8858 \begin_layout Itemize
8862 \begin_inset space ~
8868 \begin_layout Itemize
8875 \begin_layout Standard
8876 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8884 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8894 \begin_inset space ~
8897 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8898 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8899 nested section headings violate this.
8907 \begin_layout Subsection
8908 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8909 \begin_inset Index idx
8912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8913 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8921 \begin_layout Standard
8922 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8923 affected by nesting anyhow.
8927 \begin_layout Itemize
8931 \begin_layout Itemize
8935 \begin_layout Itemize
8939 \begin_layout Standard
8941 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8949 Figures and tables in
8953 are not affected by this.
8958 Have a look at section
8959 \begin_inset space ~
8963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8965 reference "sec:Floats"
8969 for more information about
8976 \begin_layout Standard
8978 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8979 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8983 \begin_layout Standard
8984 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8992 of its own, it behaves just like a
8993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9000 paragraph environment.
9001 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9005 \begin_layout Standard
9006 Here's an example with a table:
9009 \begin_layout Enumerate
9014 \begin_layout Enumerate
9015 This is (a) and it's nested.
9019 \begin_layout Standard
9020 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9026 \begin_layout Standard
9028 \begin_inset Tabular
9029 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9030 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9031 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9032 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9116 \begin_layout Standard
9117 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9124 \begin_layout Enumerate
9126 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9130 \begin_layout Enumerate
9134 \begin_layout Standard
9135 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9138 \begin_layout Enumerate
9143 \begin_layout Enumerate
9144 This is (a) and it's nested.
9148 \begin_layout Standard
9149 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9155 \begin_layout Standard
9157 \begin_inset Tabular
9158 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9159 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9160 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9161 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9245 \begin_layout Standard
9246 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9252 \begin_layout Enumerate
9259 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9262 \begin_layout Enumerate
9266 \begin_layout Standard
9267 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9271 \begin_layout Standard
9272 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9275 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9278 \begin_layout Enumerate
9283 \begin_layout Enumerate
9284 This is (a) and it's nested.
9287 \begin_layout Standard
9288 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9294 \begin_layout Standard
9296 \begin_inset Tabular
9297 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9298 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9299 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9300 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9385 \begin_layout Standard
9386 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9392 \begin_layout Enumerate
9394 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9401 \begin_layout Enumerate
9405 \begin_layout Standard
9406 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9412 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9413 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9417 \begin_layout Subsection
9418 Usage and General Features
9421 \begin_layout Standard
9422 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9423 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9432 is the innermost possible depth.
9433 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9436 \begin_layout Enumerate
9437 level #1 – outermost
9441 \begin_layout Enumerate
9446 \begin_layout Enumerate
9451 \begin_layout Enumerate
9456 \begin_layout Itemize
9461 \begin_layout Itemize
9470 \begin_layout Standard
9471 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9472 both of them in the example.
9473 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9483 For example, if we tried to nest another
9488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9495 , we would get errors.
9498 \begin_layout Subsection
9500 \begin_inset Index idx
9503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9512 \begin_layout Standard
9513 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9514 We have several examples of nested environments.
9515 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9520 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9523 \begin_layout Labeling
9524 \labelwidthstring MMM
9525 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9534 \begin_layout Labeling
9535 \labelwidthstring MMM
9536 #2-a This is level #2.
9537 We created it by using
9540 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9546 arg "depth-increment"
9553 \begin_layout Labeling
9554 \labelwidthstring MMM
9555 #3-a This is level #3.
9556 This time, we just enter
9563 arg "depth-increment"
9567 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9571 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9577 arg "depth-increment"
9584 \begin_layout Standard
9589 environment, nested inside of
9590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9598 So, it's at level #4.
9599 We did this by entering
9602 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9608 arg "depth-increment"
9611 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9616 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9632 \begin_layout Standard
9637 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9640 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9646 \begin_layout Labeling
9647 \labelwidthstring MMM
9648 #4-a This is level #4.
9652 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9655 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9660 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9664 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9669 keep nesting things inside
9670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9681 \begin_layout Labeling
9682 \labelwidthstring MMM
9683 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9688 \begin_layout Labeling
9689 \labelwidthstring MMM
9690 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9691 and this is level #6.
9692 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9696 \begin_layout Labeling
9697 \labelwidthstring MMM
9698 #5-b Back to level #5.
9702 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9708 arg "depth-decrement"
9715 \begin_layout Labeling
9716 \labelwidthstring MMM
9720 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9726 arg "depth-decrement"
9729 , we're back at level #4.
9733 \begin_layout Labeling
9734 \labelwidthstring MMM
9735 #3-b Back to level #3.
9736 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9740 \begin_layout Labeling
9741 \labelwidthstring MMM
9742 #2-b Back to level #2.
9747 \begin_layout Labeling
9748 \labelwidthstring MMM
9749 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9750 After this sentence, we will enter
9754 and change the paragraph environment back to
9761 \begin_layout Standard
9762 We could have also used the
9778 environment in place of the
9783 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9786 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9787 Example 2: Inheritance
9790 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9791 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9794 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9803 arg "depth-increment"
9807 \begin_inset Newline newline
9810 which, we will change to the
9818 \begin_layout Enumerate
9823 environment, at level #2.
9826 \begin_layout Enumerate
9827 Notice how the nested
9831 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9835 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9839 \begin_layout Standard
9840 We ended this example by entering
9845 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9849 and reset the nesting depth by using
9852 arg "depth-decrement"
9858 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9859 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9868 \begin_inset Argument 1
9871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9872 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9880 \begin_layout Enumerate
9881 This is level #1, in an
9885 paragraph environment.
9886 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9890 \begin_layout Enumerate
9895 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9901 arg "depth-increment"
9905 Now, what happens if we nest an
9909 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9910 label be? An asterisk?
9914 \begin_layout Itemize
9924 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9925 So, its label is a bullet.
9926 (We got here by using
9929 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9935 arg "depth-increment"
9938 , then changing the environment to
9946 \begin_layout Itemize
9947 Here's level #4, produced using
9950 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9956 arg "depth-increment"
9960 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9965 \begin_layout Enumerate
9968 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9973 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9977 , because we are in the
9985 environment (that is, it is an
10000 \begin_layout Enumerate
10005 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10006 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10010 \begin_layout Enumerate
10011 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10014 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10017 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10020 \begin_layout Enumerate
10024 arg "depth-decrement"
10027 to decrease the depth after the next
10030 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10037 \begin_layout Enumerate
10039 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10044 \begin_layout Enumerate
10046 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10047 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10051 \begin_layout Enumerate
10052 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10061 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10066 reset the counter for the label.
10070 \begin_layout Enumerate
10074 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10080 arg "depth-decrement"
10083 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10084 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10085 into the twofold-nested
10093 \begin_layout Enumerate
10094 The same thing happens if we do another
10097 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10103 arg "depth-decrement"
10106 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10109 \begin_layout Standard
10110 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10115 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10126 The number of other
10130 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10137 The same rule applies for the
10141 environment, as well.
10144 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10145 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10148 \begin_layout Enumerate
10149 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10150 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10151 the same detail with how we did it.
10160 \begin_layout Standard
10168 arg "depth-increment"
10175 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10176 the example in parentheses someplace.
10177 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10178 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10179 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10183 \begin_layout Enumerate
10188 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10192 \begin_layout Verse
10193 Now we will add verse.
10194 \begin_inset Newline newline
10197 It will get much worse.
10198 \begin_inset Newline newline
10208 arg "depth-increment"
10218 \begin_layout Verse
10219 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10220 \begin_inset Newline newline
10223 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10224 \begin_inset Newline newline
10230 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10238 \begin_layout Verse
10239 Here comes a table:
10243 \begin_layout Standard
10244 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10250 \begin_layout Standard
10252 \begin_inset Tabular
10253 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10254 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10255 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10256 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10341 \begin_layout Verse
10345 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10355 arg "depth-increment"
10361 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10367 \begin_inset Newline newline
10375 arg "depth-decrement"
10382 \begin_layout Enumerate
10387 : level #1) This is another item.
10388 Note that selecting a
10392 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10393 3 times to put the table inside the
10401 \begin_layout Quotation
10402 We're now ending the
10406 list and changing to
10411 We're still at level #1.
10412 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10413 The next set of paragraphs is a
10414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10421 We will nest both the
10428 \begin_inset space ~
10433 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10437 for the letter body.
10441 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10444 to preserve the depth.
10445 Remember that you need to use
10448 arg "newline-insert newline"
10451 to create multiple lines inside the
10458 \begin_inset space ~
10468 \begin_layout Right Address
10470 \begin_inset Newline newline
10473 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10474 \begin_inset Newline newline
10480 \begin_layout Address
10482 \begin_inset space ~
10488 \begin_layout Quotation
10489 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10493 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10494 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10495 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10496 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10497 as soon as possible.
10498 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10501 \begin_layout Quotation
10502 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10503 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10504 with your order, along with payment.
10507 \begin_layout Quotation
10508 We thank you again for your patience.
10511 \begin_layout Address
10513 \begin_inset Newline newline
10520 \begin_layout Quotation
10521 That ends that example!
10524 \begin_layout Standard
10525 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10526 gives you a lot of power with just
10528 We could have easily nested an
10549 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10552 \begin_layout Subsection
10554 \begin_inset Index idx
10557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10558 Nesting ! Separation
10564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10566 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10573 \begin_layout Standard
10574 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10576 For example you need two different enumerations:
10579 \begin_layout Enumerate
10584 \begin_layout Enumerate
10589 \begin_layout Enumerate
10593 \begin_layout Standard
10594 \begin_inset Separator plain
10600 \begin_layout Itemize
10606 \begin_layout Standard
10607 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10613 \begin_layout Enumerate
10617 \begin_layout Enumerate
10621 \begin_layout Enumerate
10625 \begin_layout Standard
10626 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10627 list item and use the menu
10629 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10630 Separated <Name> Above
10634 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10635 Separated <Name> Below
10638 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10639 ) and before or behind it the
10641 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10644 \begin_layout Standard
10645 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10646 (red arrow in LyX).
10647 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10648 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10651 \begin_layout Standard
10652 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10655 arg "paragraph-break"
10662 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10665 \begin_layout Section
10666 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10667 \begin_inset Index idx
10670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10679 \begin_layout Standard
10680 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10681 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10683 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10684 be broken at the end of a line.
10685 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10689 \begin_layout Subsection
10691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10693 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10698 \begin_inset Index idx
10701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10710 \begin_layout Standard
10711 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10712 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10713 ) not to break the line at
10715 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10718 \begin_layout Quote
10719 Further documentation is given in section
10720 \begin_inset Newline newline
10724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10726 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10734 \begin_layout Standard
10735 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10750 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10759 A protected space is set with
10761 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10762 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10764 \begin_inset space ~
10772 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10778 \begin_layout Subsection
10780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10782 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10787 \begin_inset Index idx
10790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10791 Spacing ! Horizontal
10799 \begin_layout Standard
10800 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10802 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10803 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10807 The length units are listed in Appendix
10808 \begin_inset space ~
10812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10814 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10821 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10825 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10830 \begin_inset Index idx
10833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10834 Spaces ! Inter-word
10842 \begin_layout Standard
10843 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10844 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10845 at the ends of sentences.
10846 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10847 automatically takes care about this.
10848 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10849 followed by a period; see section
10850 \begin_inset space ~
10854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10856 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10861 To insert a normal space, select
10863 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10864 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10866 \begin_inset space ~
10874 arg "space-insert normal"
10880 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10884 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10889 \begin_inset Index idx
10892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10901 \begin_layout Standard
10903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10910 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10919 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10920 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10921 inside abbreviations:
10924 \begin_layout Quote
10926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10930 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10933 \begin_layout Standard
10934 or between values and units.
10935 Compare for example this:
10936 \begin_inset Newline newline
10940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10944 \begin_inset Newline newline
10947 10 kg (normal space
10950 \begin_layout Standard
10951 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10954 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10956 \begin_inset space ~
10964 arg "space-insert thin"
10970 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10974 \begin_layout Standard
10975 You can also insert the following space types:
10978 \begin_layout Description
10980 \begin_inset space ~
10984 \begin_inset space ~
10987 space A line with a
10988 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10992 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10996 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10999 negative thin space between the arrows.
11002 \begin_layout Description
11004 \begin_inset space ~
11008 \begin_inset space ~
11011 space A line with a
11012 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11016 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11020 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11023 negative medium space between the arrows.
11026 \begin_layout Description
11028 \begin_inset space ~
11032 \begin_inset space ~
11035 space A line with a
11036 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11040 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11044 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11047 negative thick space between the arrows.
11050 \begin_layout Description
11052 \begin_inset space ~
11056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11060 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11064 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11068 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11072 \begin_inset space ~
11076 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11079 em) space between the arrows.
11082 \begin_layout Description
11084 \begin_inset space ~
11088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11092 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11096 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11100 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11104 \begin_inset space ~
11108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11111 em) space between the arrows.
11114 \begin_layout Description
11116 \begin_inset space ~
11120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11124 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11128 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11132 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11136 \begin_inset space ~
11140 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11143 em) space between the arrows.
11146 \begin_layout Description
11148 \begin_inset space ~
11152 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11156 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11161 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11168 cm space between the arrows.
11171 \begin_layout Standard
11173 \begin_inset space ~
11177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11179 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11183 lists the different space sizes.
11186 \begin_layout Standard
11187 \begin_inset Float table
11194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11195 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11198 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11200 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11204 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11214 \begin_inset Tabular
11215 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11216 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11217 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11218 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11334 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11491 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11493 \begin_inset Index idx
11496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11505 \begin_layout Standard
11506 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11507 feature for adding extra space
11508 in a uniform fashion.
11509 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11510 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11511 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11512 equally between themselves.
11515 \begin_layout Standard
11516 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11519 \begin_layout Quote
11521 This is on the left side
11522 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11525 This is on the right
11528 \begin_layout Quote
11531 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11535 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11541 \begin_layout Quote
11544 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11548 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11552 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11558 \begin_layout Standard
11559 That was an example in the
11565 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11569 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11573 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11576 is one in a standard paragraph.
11577 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11581 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11584 \begin_layout Standard
11585 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11588 \begin_inset space ~
11593 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11596 \begin_layout Standard
11598 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11602 \begin_inset space ~
11608 \begin_layout Standard
11610 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11614 \begin_inset space ~
11620 \begin_layout Standard
11622 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11626 \begin_inset space ~
11632 \begin_layout Standard
11634 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11638 \begin_inset space ~
11644 \begin_layout Standard
11646 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11650 \begin_inset space ~
11656 \begin_layout Standard
11658 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11662 \begin_inset space ~
11668 \begin_layout Standard
11669 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11677 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11681 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11683 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11684 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11688 option in the space dialog.
11696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11700 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11705 \begin_inset Index idx
11708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11717 \begin_layout Standard
11718 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11719 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11722 \begin_layout Standard
11723 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11726 What is correct English?:
11727 \begin_inset Newline newline
11731 \begin_inset Newline newline
11735 \begin_inset space ~
11738 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11739 \begin_inset Newline newline
11743 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11754 \begin_inset Newline newline
11758 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11769 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11775 \begin_layout Standard
11777 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11782 \begin_inset space ~
11786 \begin_inset space ~
11790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11794 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11796 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11797 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11801 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11807 \begin_inset space ~
11811 \begin_inset space ~
11815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11818 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11827 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11828 That is why it is named
11829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11837 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11838 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11842 \begin_layout Subsection
11844 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11846 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11851 \begin_inset Index idx
11854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11863 \begin_layout Standard
11864 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11866 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11867 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11869 \begin_inset space ~
11875 There you find the following sizes:
11878 \begin_layout Standard
11891 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11892 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11897 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11899 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11900 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11902 \begin_inset space ~
11908 \begin_inset Index idx
11911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11912 Document ! Settings
11917 for the paragraph separation.
11918 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11929 \begin_layout Standard
11935 \begin_inset Index idx
11938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11944 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11945 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11950 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11951 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11960 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11969 s are described in section
11970 \begin_inset space ~
11974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11976 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11985 If there are several
11989 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11990 You can therefore use
11994 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11997 \begin_layout Standard
12002 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12003 \begin_inset space ~
12007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12009 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12016 \begin_layout Standard
12017 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12027 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12028 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12040 \begin_layout Subsection
12041 Paragraph Alignment
12042 \begin_inset Index idx
12045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12046 Paragraph ! Alignment
12054 \begin_layout Standard
12055 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12057 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12060 dialog (toolbar button
12063 arg "layout-paragraph"
12067 There are five possibilities:
12070 \begin_layout Itemize
12078 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12084 \begin_layout Itemize
12092 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12098 \begin_layout Itemize
12106 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12112 \begin_layout Itemize
12120 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12126 \begin_layout Itemize
12134 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12140 \begin_layout Standard
12141 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12142 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12143 the left and right margins.
12144 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12147 \begin_layout Standard
12149 This paragraph is right aligned,
12152 \begin_layout Standard
12154 this one is centered,
12157 \begin_layout Standard
12159 this one is left aligned.
12162 \begin_layout Subsection
12164 \begin_inset Index idx
12167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12168 Page breaks ! Forced
12174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12176 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12183 \begin_layout Standard
12184 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12185 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12186 force a page break where you want one.
12187 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12188 is good at page breaking.
12189 Only if you use a lot of
12193 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12194 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12197 \begin_layout Standard
12198 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12199 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12203 have to change the page breaking.
12206 \begin_layout Standard
12207 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12209 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12211 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12212 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12214 \begin_inset space ~
12220 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12223 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12225 \begin_inset space ~
12230 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12232 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12233 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12236 \begin_layout Standard
12237 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12238 at the top of a page.
12239 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12241 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12242 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12243 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12247 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12251 to learn more about
12258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12260 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12262 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12267 \begin_inset Index idx
12270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12271 Page breaks ! Clear
12279 \begin_layout Standard
12280 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12281 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12282 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12283 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12284 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12287 \begin_layout Standard
12288 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12290 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12291 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12293 \begin_inset space ~
12299 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12301 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12302 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12304 \begin_inset space ~
12308 \begin_inset space ~
12313 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12314 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12317 \begin_layout Subsection
12319 \begin_inset Index idx
12322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12331 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12338 \begin_layout Standard
12339 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12341 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12344 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12346 \begin_inset space ~
12350 \begin_inset space ~
12358 arg "newline-insert newline"
12362 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12364 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12365 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12367 \begin_inset space ~
12371 \begin_inset space ~
12379 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12382 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12384 This is useful to avoid
12385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12392 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12395 \begin_layout Standard
12396 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12397 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12399 very good at line breaking.
12400 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12401 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12402 \begin_inset space ~
12406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12408 reference "sec:Quote"
12413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12415 reference "sec:Verse"
12420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12422 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12429 \begin_layout Subsection
12431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12433 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12438 \begin_inset Index idx
12441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12450 \begin_layout Standard
12452 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12463 \begin_layout Standard
12467 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12468 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12470 \begin_inset space ~
12475 you can insert horizontal lines.
12476 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12477 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12478 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12481 \begin_layout Standard
12483 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12494 \begin_layout Section
12495 Characters and Symbols
12498 \begin_layout Standard
12499 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12500 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12501 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12509 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12513 for information on how this is done.
12516 \begin_layout Standard
12517 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12522 dialog via the menu
12524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12525 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12531 \begin_layout Standard
12532 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12540 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12541 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12543 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12551 \begin_layout Section
12552 Fonts and Text Styles
12553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12555 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12562 \begin_layout Subsection
12564 \begin_inset Index idx
12567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12576 \begin_layout Standard
12577 There are two types of fonts:
12580 \begin_layout Description
12582 \begin_inset space ~
12586 \begin_inset Index idx
12589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12595 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12600 characters) in the font.
12601 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12602 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12603 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12604 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12605 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12606 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12607 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12608 \begin_inset Newline newline
12611 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12612 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12613 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12614 sizes than at small ones.
12615 \begin_inset Newline newline
12629 \begin_inset space ~
12637 \begin_layout Description
12639 \begin_inset space ~
12643 \begin_inset Index idx
12646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12652 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12653 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12654 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12655 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12656 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12657 image manipulation program.
12658 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12659 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12660 \begin_inset space ~
12663 pixels high up to 34
12664 \begin_inset space ~
12667 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12668 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12669 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12671 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12672 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12673 \begin_inset Newline newline
12676 Bitmap fonts are named
12679 \begin_inset space ~
12684 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12687 \begin_layout Standard
12688 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12689 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12690 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12691 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12692 use scalable fonts.
12695 \begin_layout Standard
12696 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12699 \begin_layout Standard
12700 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12702 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12704 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12707 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12708 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12709 font to emphasize text, you use an
12710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12718 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12720 In \SpecialChar LyX
12721 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12725 \begin_layout Subsection
12728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12730 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12737 \begin_layout Standard
12738 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12739 used its own fonts.
12740 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12741 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12744 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12745 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12746 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12747 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12748 to a word processor.
12749 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12750 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12751 files are very portable across
12752 different machines.
12753 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12754 has increased a lot
12755 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12758 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12760 \begin_inset space ~
12764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12766 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12771 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12772 code in the document
12773 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12776 \begin_layout Standard
12777 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12778 engines that are also able directly
12779 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12781 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12783 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12785 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12786 that is installed on your system.
12787 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12790 \begin_layout Standard
12791 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12799 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12800 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12808 \begin_layout Subsection
12809 Document Font and Font size
12810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12812 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12817 \begin_inset Index idx
12820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12827 \begin_inset Index idx
12830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12839 \begin_layout Standard
12840 You can set the document fonts in the
12842 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12846 \begin_inset Index idx
12849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12850 Document ! Settings
12860 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12861 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12864 \begin_inset space ~
12873 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12875 \begin_inset space ~
12878 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12881 \begin_layout Standard
12886 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12887 This requires that you use
12899 as the output format, i.
12900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12904 \begin_inset space \space{}
12907 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12908 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12909 installed (see section
12910 \begin_inset space ~
12914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12916 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12921 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12923 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12924 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12926 \begin_inset space ~
12929 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12930 cannot determine the family.
12931 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12932 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12935 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12938 \begin_layout Standard
12939 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12940 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12945 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12951 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12953 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
12955 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
12958 font encoding, this is
12959 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
12960 , depending on the document language,
12963 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
12964 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12972 \begin_inset space ~
12978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12988 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
12989 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12997 \begin_inset space ~
13003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13011 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13032 European Computer Modern
13035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13043 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13046 \begin_layout Standard
13051 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13052 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13057 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13060 \begin_inset space ~
13065 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13071 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13072 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13075 \begin_layout Itemize
13079 \begin_inset space ~
13084 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13097 \begin_inset space ~
13102 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13103 community in order to replace
13107 as the default font.
13108 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13109 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13112 \begin_inset space ~
13125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13126 One difference is improved kerning.
13134 \begin_layout Itemize
13135 If you do not like the look of
13143 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13144 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13148 \begin_inset space ~
13154 \begin_inset space ~
13164 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13165 \begin_inset space ~
13168 serif and typewriter fonts,
13172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13173 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13180 \begin_inset space ~
13189 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13194 \begin_inset space \space{}
13202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13206 \begin_inset space \space{}
13212 \begin_inset space ~
13220 \begin_inset space ~
13230 but you can also select your own.
13231 \begin_inset Newline newline
13234 The differences between roman,
13237 \begin_inset space ~
13246 fonts are explained in section
13247 \begin_inset space ~
13251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13253 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13258 \begin_inset Newline newline
13264 \begin_inset space ~
13269 was originally designed for newspapers.
13270 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13271 into the small newspaper columns.
13275 \begin_inset space ~
13280 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13283 \begin_layout Standard
13284 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13297 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13302 depends on the class you are using.
13303 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13306 \begin_layout Standard
13307 Note that the font size is the
13312 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13313 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13314 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13315 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13318 \begin_inset space ~
13324 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13325 \begin_inset space ~
13329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13331 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13338 \begin_layout Standard
13342 \begin_inset space ~
13347 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13349 \begin_inset space ~
13352 serif or typewriter.
13357 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13367 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13370 \begin_layout Standard
13375 LaTeX font encoding
13377 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13378 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13384 \begin_inset Index idx
13387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13395 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13397 \begin_inset space ~
13401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13403 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13410 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13411 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13412 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13416 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13424 \begin_layout Standard
13425 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13427 Use Old Style Figures
13431 Use True Small Caps
13434 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13437 Use Old Style Figures
13439 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13441 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13449 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13453 Use True Small Caps
13455 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13456 of scaled capitals.
13457 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13458 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13461 \begin_layout Standard
13466 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13467 a font to display the script characters.
13471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13472 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13478 \begin_inset Index idx
13481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13488 So this has no effect for the document language
13504 \begin_layout Standard
13507 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13509 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13510 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13516 \begin_inset Index idx
13519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13521 packages ! microtype
13530 \begin_layout Standard
13533 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13535 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13540 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13541 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13547 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13548 \begin_inset space ~
13552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13554 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13564 \begin_layout Standard
13565 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13569 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13577 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13582 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13583 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13585 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13587 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13590 dialog, see section
13591 \begin_inset space ~
13595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13597 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13609 \begin_layout Subsection
13613 \begin_layout Standard
13614 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13615 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13617 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13618 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13619 choose a math font in the dialog
13621 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13625 \begin_inset Index idx
13628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13629 Document ! Settings
13635 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13636 automatically selects a math font.
13637 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13638 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13647 \begin_inset space ~
13653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13658 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13659 document font is available.
13662 \begin_layout Standard
13663 Note that the math font will not be used for
13667 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13673 or by the insertion of the command
13680 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13681 \begin_inset space ~
13685 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13686 while the math characters do not.
13688 \begin_inset space ~
13691 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13694 \begin_inset space ~
13702 \begin_inset space ~
13707 in the document font settings.
13710 \begin_layout Standard
13711 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13712 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13713 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13714 font (in most cases
13715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13721 \begin_inset space ~
13727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13730 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13731 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13739 \begin_inset space ~
13745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13751 \begin_layout Subsection
13753 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13755 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13759 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13763 name "subsec:charstyles"
13770 \begin_inset Index idx
13773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13780 \begin_inset Index idx
13783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13792 \begin_layout Standard
13793 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13794 automatically changes the
13795 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13798 style for certain paragraph environments.
13800 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13801 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13803 This is where we meet the concept of
13809 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13811 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13815 \begin_layout Standard
13817 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13822 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13824 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13837 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13846 e., available with all document classes.
13847 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13851 for specific purposes.
13852 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13855 \begin_layout Standard
13857 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13858 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13868 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13872 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13885 — you customized the
13890 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13891 among them, encourage the use of
13903 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13904 \begin_inset space ~
13908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13910 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13915 Rather than fiddling with
13919 , they encourage the use of
13923 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13924 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13928 \begin_inset Quotes els
13932 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13935 ), not their form (
13936 \begin_inset Quotes els
13940 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13944 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
13945 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
13946 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
13947 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
13948 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
13949 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
13955 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
13956 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13959 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
13960 With a semantic markup (such as
13964 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
13969 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13971 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
13972 of a document, using different markup semantics.
13975 \begin_layout Standard
13977 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
13978 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
13979 by \SpecialChar LyX
13985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13987 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
13988 Builtin Text Styles
13989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13991 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
13998 \begin_layout Standard
14000 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14001 The two builtin text styles can be
14002 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14006 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14010 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14011 both of these styles
14014 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14022 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14028 \begin_layout Standard
14033 style, do one of the following:
14036 \begin_layout Itemize
14037 click on the toolbar button
14046 \begin_layout Itemize
14047 use the key binding
14054 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14058 \begin_layout Itemize
14060 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14068 arg "dialog-show character"
14074 arg "dialog-show character"
14077 ) as described in section
14078 \begin_inset space ~
14082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14084 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14093 \begin_layout Standard
14094 These commands are all toggles.
14099 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14102 \begin_layout Standard
14103 One typically uses the
14107 style for proper names.
14109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14116 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14122 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14126 \begin_layout Standard
14128 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14133 is producing text in
14137 , but the definition can be changed.
14142 \begin_layout Standard
14144 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14146 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14154 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14161 \begin_layout Itemize
14162 clicking on the toolbar button
14171 \begin_layout Itemize
14172 using the keybindings
14179 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14183 \begin_layout Itemize
14185 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14193 arg "dialog-show character"
14199 arg "dialog-show character"
14202 ) as described in section
14203 \begin_inset space ~
14207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14209 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14218 \begin_layout Standard
14223 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14225 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14227 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14230 packages use a different font
14231 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14232 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14238 \begin_layout Standard
14239 We've been using the
14243 style all over the place in this document.
14244 Here's one more example:
14247 \begin_layout Quotation
14251 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14253 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14259 \begin_layout Standard
14260 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14261 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14262 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14263 the common tendency to overuse
14264 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14266 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14271 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14275 \begin_layout Standard
14277 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14278 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14279 only as font changes and integrated in the
14287 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14290 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14297 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14299 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14303 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14306 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14308 \begin_inset space ~
14311 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14313 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14319 arg "dialog-show character"
14325 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14327 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14333 arg "dialog-show character"
14337 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14341 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14343 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14347 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14354 \begin_layout Standard
14356 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14357 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14359 \begin_inset space ~
14363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14365 reference "subsec:Modules"
14372 ), or local layout settings (see section
14373 \begin_inset space ~
14377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14379 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14384 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14388 markup for specific functions.
14389 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14394 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14404 \begin_inset Quotes els
14408 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14414 \begin_layout Standard
14416 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14417 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14419 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14425 \begin_layout Standard
14427 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14428 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14433 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14434 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14435 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14440 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14441 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14446 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14454 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14455 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14456 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14457 \begin_inset Flex Code
14460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14462 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14471 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14476 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14485 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14490 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14499 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14500 on screen their formal appearance.
14505 \begin_layout Subsection
14507 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14509 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14513 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14519 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14521 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14527 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14529 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14535 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14540 \begin_inset Index idx
14543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14552 \begin_layout Standard
14553 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14554 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14557 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14559 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14561 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14565 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14566 the properties of text passages
14567 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14571 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14572 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14573 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14574 from ordinary dialog.
14575 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14579 \begin_layout Standard
14581 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14582 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14583 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14584 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14585 the properties of the respective text passages.
14590 comes in as a last resort.
14595 \begin_layout Standard
14596 Before we document how to
14597 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14598 use custom character style
14599 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14600 tweak the text properties
14602 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14603 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14605 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14609 \begin_inset Newline newline
14612 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14613 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14616 \begin_layout Standard
14618 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14619 use custom character styles
14620 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14621 tweak text properties
14624 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14627 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14629 \begin_inset space ~
14632 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14634 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14640 arg "dialog-show character"
14645 dialog or press the toolbar button
14648 arg "dialog-show character"
14653 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14656 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14657 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14659 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14662 property that you can choose.
14663 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14666 \begin_inset space ~
14671 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14673 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14677 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14679 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14684 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14685 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14686 environments all at once.
14689 \begin_layout Standard
14691 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14693 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14696 properties, and their options (in addition to
14699 \begin_inset space ~
14705 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14709 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14717 \begin_layout Labeling
14718 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14732 The possible options are:
14736 \begin_layout Labeling
14737 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14742 This is the Roman font family.
14743 Normally a serif font.
14744 It's also the default family.
14754 \begin_layout Labeling
14755 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14759 \begin_inset space ~
14766 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14778 \begin_layout Labeling
14779 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14786 This is the Typewriter font family.
14792 arg "font-typewriter"
14798 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14802 \begin_layout Standard
14804 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14805 The general differences of these families are:
14808 \begin_layout Itemize
14810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14815 fonts use characters with serifs.
14816 These are the small
14817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14824 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14825 The following example shows the difference:
14826 \begin_inset Newline newline
14830 \begin_inset Newline newline
14835 text without serifs
14838 \begin_inset Newline newline
14841 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14842 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14849 \begin_layout Itemize
14851 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14856 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14857 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14858 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14861 \begin_layout Itemize
14863 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14876 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14894 \begin_inset Newline newline
14898 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14903 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14914 \begin_inset Note Note
14917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14919 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14920 For more on phantoms see section
14921 \begin_inset space ~
14925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14927 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14937 \begin_inset Newline newline
14946 \begin_layout Labeling
14947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14952 This corresponds to the print weight.
14957 \begin_layout Labeling
14958 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14963 This is the Medium font series.
14964 It's also the default series.
14967 \begin_layout Labeling
14968 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14975 This is the Bold font series.
14988 \begin_layout Labeling
14989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14994 As the name implies.
14999 \begin_layout Labeling
15000 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15005 This is the Upright font shape.
15006 It's also the default shape.
15009 \begin_layout Labeling
15010 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15020 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15025 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15030 s the Italic font shape
15036 \begin_layout Labeling
15037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15044 This is the Slanted font shape
15046 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15047 , this is different from italic).
15050 \begin_layout Labeling
15051 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15055 \begin_inset space ~
15062 This is the Small caps font shape
15069 \begin_layout Labeling
15070 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15075 Alters the text color.
15076 Note that not all DVI
15077 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15079 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15082 viewers are able to display colors.
15084 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15088 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15090 \begin_inset space ~
15097 , which means that the document default color set in
15099 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15100 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15106 \begin_inset space ~
15112 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15114 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15118 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15198 \begin_inset Index idx
15201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15210 \begin_layout Labeling
15211 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15216 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15217 the language of the document.
15218 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15219 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15220 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15223 in blue to indicate the change
15224 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15225 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15229 \begin_inset Newline newline
15232 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15234 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15235 When using the spell checking (see section
15236 \begin_inset space ~
15240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15242 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15246 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15247 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15249 \begin_inset Newline newline
15252 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15254 Exclude from Spellchecking
15257 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15260 \begin_layout Labeling
15261 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15266 Alters the size of the font.
15268 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15270 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15274 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15277 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15278 document font size.
15279 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15280 the details, but a general description of what
15286 \begin_layout Labeling
15287 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15308 arg "font-size tiny"
15314 \begin_layout Labeling
15315 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15336 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15342 \begin_layout Labeling
15343 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15364 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15370 \begin_layout Labeling
15371 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15392 arg "font-size small"
15398 \begin_layout Labeling
15399 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15413 It's also the default size.
15417 arg "font-size normal"
15423 \begin_layout Labeling
15424 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15445 arg "font-size large"
15451 \begin_layout Labeling
15452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15473 arg "font-size larger"
15479 \begin_layout Labeling
15480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15501 arg "font-size largest"
15507 \begin_layout Labeling
15508 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15529 arg "font-size huge"
15535 \begin_layout Labeling
15536 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15557 arg "font-size giant"
15563 \begin_layout Labeling
15564 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15569 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15589 arg "font-size increase"
15595 \begin_layout Labeling
15596 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15601 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15621 arg "font-size decrease"
15628 \begin_layout Standard
15633 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15634 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15636 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15637 — use those instead.
15638 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15641 \begin_layout Labeling
15642 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15644 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15648 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15654 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15655 change a few other things at the character level
15656 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15657 have text passages being underlined
15661 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15662 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15663 days, when you could not change fonts.
15664 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15665 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15666 because some people
15670 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15677 \begin_layout Labeling
15678 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15680 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15687 This is text with emphasize on
15690 This might seem like the same as
15694 , but it is actually a bit different.
15700 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15702 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15703 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15707 \begin_layout Labeling
15708 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15710 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15715 Don't use underlining.
15720 \begin_layout Labeling
15721 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15723 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15727 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15735 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15737 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15746 arg "font-underline"
15752 \begin_inset Newline newline
15756 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15759 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15760 when you could not change fonts.
15761 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15762 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15763 because some people
15767 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15772 \begin_layout Labeling
15773 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15777 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15779 \begin_inset space ~
15788 This is text with Double under
15789 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15791 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15800 arg "font-underunderline"
15804 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15806 \begin_inset Newline newline
15809 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15810 about double underbar
15815 \begin_layout Labeling
15816 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15820 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15822 \begin_inset space ~
15831 This is text with Wavy under
15832 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15834 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15843 arg "font-underwave"
15847 \begin_inset Newline newline
15850 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15851 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15852 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15857 \begin_layout Labeling
15858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15860 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15865 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15871 \begin_layout Labeling
15872 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15874 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15879 Don't use strikethrough.
15882 \begin_layout Labeling
15883 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15887 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15889 \begin_inset space ~
15893 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15901 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15903 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15904 Single strikethrough
15912 arg "font-strikeout"
15916 \begin_inset Newline newline
15919 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15920 changed in the meantime.
15923 \begin_layout Labeling
15924 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15926 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
15930 \begin_inset space ~
15934 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
15936 \begin_inset space ~
15940 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
15948 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
15950 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
15956 \begin_inset Newline newline
15959 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15963 \begin_layout Standard
15965 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
15966 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
15967 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
15968 \begin_inset space ~
15972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15974 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15981 \begin_layout Itemize
15983 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
15990 This is text with emphasize on
15995 \begin_layout Itemize
15999 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16006 This is text with Noun on.
16008 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16015 , this is a logical attribute.
16016 Normally it's equivalent to
16019 \begin_inset space ~
16029 \begin_layout Standard
16030 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16031 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16033 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16038 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16039 chosen a new character style
16040 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16041 applied a text property
16044 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16047 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16049 \begin_inset space ~
16052 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16054 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16060 arg "dialog-show character"
16068 arg "dialog-show character"
16071 ) dialog, the settings are
16072 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16076 You can activate the
16077 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16079 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16080 last applied properties
16082 by using the toolbar button
16085 arg "textstyle-apply"
16089 The button lets you apply
16090 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16091 your custom character style
16092 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16095 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16097 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16098 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16099 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16100 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16105 \begin_layout Standard
16106 To completely reset the
16107 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16109 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16110 text properties of a selection
16112 to the default, use
16113 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16115 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16125 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16130 from the menu of the toolbar button
16133 arg "textstyle-apply"
16140 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16141 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16142 you just set the shape to
16143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16161 \begin_inset space ~
16175 \begin_layout Standard
16177 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16178 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16186 \begin_inset space ~
16198 \begin_layout Itemize
16200 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16213 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16231 \begin_inset Newline newline
16235 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16249 \begin_inset Note Note
16252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16253 For more on phantoms see section
16254 \begin_inset space ~
16258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16260 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16270 \begin_inset Newline newline
16276 \begin_layout Itemize
16278 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16283 fonts use characters with serifs.
16284 These are the small
16285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16292 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16293 The following example shows the difference:
16294 \begin_inset Newline newline
16298 \begin_inset Newline newline
16303 text without serifs
16306 \begin_inset Newline newline
16309 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16310 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16317 \begin_layout Itemize
16319 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16324 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16325 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16326 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16331 \begin_layout Standard
16333 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16341 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16342 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16345 \begin_inset space ~
16350 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16351 the property to be removed.
16352 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16353 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16354 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16372 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16373 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16381 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16385 \begin_inset space ~
16390 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16401 If you, for example, set
16402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16420 \begin_inset space ~
16425 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16434 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16439 \begin_layout Standard
16441 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16444 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16445 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16448 \begin_layout Section
16449 Printing and Previewing
16452 \begin_layout Subsection
16456 \begin_layout Standard
16457 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16458 using \SpecialChar LyX
16459 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16460 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16461 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16462 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16464 Additional Features
16469 \begin_layout Standard
16471 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16474 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16475 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16476 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16479 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16480 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16481 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16482 to turn your writing into printable output.
16483 This happens in two stages:
16486 \begin_layout Enumerate
16487 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16488 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16490 a file with the extension,
16491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16505 \begin_layout Enumerate
16506 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16507 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16508 to use the commands in the
16512 file to produce printable output.
16515 \begin_layout Subsection
16516 Output file formats
16517 \begin_inset Index idx
16520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16529 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16537 Simple text (ASCII)
16538 \begin_inset Index idx
16541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16542 File formats ! ASCII
16550 \begin_layout Standard
16551 This file type has the extension
16552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16564 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16568 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16575 \begin_layout Standard
16576 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16578 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16579 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16581 \begin_inset space ~
16587 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16588 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16589 bibliography (section
16590 \begin_inset space ~
16594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16596 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16601 If your document includes such material, use
16603 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16604 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16606 \begin_inset space ~
16610 \begin_inset space ~
16614 \begin_inset space ~
16622 \begin_inset space ~
16626 \begin_inset space ~
16632 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16633 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16636 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16639 \begin_inset Index idx
16642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16643 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16652 \begin_layout Standard
16653 This file type has the extension
16654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16665 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16668 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16669 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16670 -Errors or to process it manually
16671 with console commands.
16672 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16673 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16674 's temporary directory whenever you
16675 view or export your document.
16678 \begin_layout Standard
16679 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16680 -file using the menu
16682 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16683 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16687 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16688 export variants are explained in section
16689 \begin_inset space ~
16693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16695 reference "subsec:Export"
16702 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16704 \begin_inset Index idx
16707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16716 \begin_layout Standard
16717 This file type has the extension
16718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16738 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16739 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16740 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16744 \begin_layout Standard
16745 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16746 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16747 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16748 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16749 when you view the DVI.
16750 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16753 \begin_layout Standard
16754 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16756 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16757 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16762 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16763 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16765 \begin_inset space ~
16771 The latter option uses the program
16773 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16779 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16782 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16783 font access (see section
16784 \begin_inset space ~
16788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16790 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16795 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16796 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16801 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16803 \begin_inset Index idx
16806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16807 File formats ! PostScript
16815 \begin_layout Standard
16816 This file type has the extension
16817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16829 PostScript was developed by the company
16833 as a printer language.
16834 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16836 PostScript can be seen as a
16837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16840 programming language
16841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16844 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16849 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16856 \begin_inset Index idx
16859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16861 packages ! pstricks
16871 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16874 \begin_layout Standard
16875 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16879 Encapsulated PostScript
16880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16883 (EPS, file extension
16884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16896 As \SpecialChar LyX
16897 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16898 convert them in the background to EPS.
16899 If, for example, you have 50
16900 \begin_inset space ~
16903 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16905 \begin_inset space ~
16908 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16909 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16911 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16912 EPS to avoid this problem.
16915 \begin_layout Standard
16916 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16918 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16919 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16927 \begin_inset Index idx
16930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16937 \begin_inset Index idx
16940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16949 \begin_layout Standard
16950 This file type has the extension
16951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16967 Portable Document Format
16968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16975 was derived from PostScript.
16976 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
16978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16985 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
16986 looks exactly the same.
16989 \begin_layout Standard
16990 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
16991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16994 Joint Photographic Experts Group
16995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16998 (JPG, file extension
16999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17026 Portable Network Graphics
17027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17030 (PNG, file extension
17031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17043 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17044 converts them in the
17045 background to one of these formats.
17046 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17047 will slow down your workflow.
17048 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17051 \begin_layout Standard
17052 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17054 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17060 \begin_layout Description
17062 \begin_inset space ~
17065 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17069 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17072 \begin_layout Description
17074 \begin_inset space ~
17081 ) This uses the program
17083 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17086 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17089 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17092 is a new engine, derived from
17096 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17097 access (see section
17098 \begin_inset space ~
17102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17104 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17109 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17110 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17115 \begin_layout Description
17117 \begin_inset space ~
17124 ) This uses the program
17129 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17135 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17136 font access (see section
17137 \begin_inset space ~
17141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17143 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17148 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17149 vertically written Japanese.
17152 \begin_layout Description
17154 \begin_inset space ~
17157 (cropped) This is the same as
17160 \begin_inset space ~
17165 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17166 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17167 to generate good-looking
17168 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17171 \begin_layout Description
17173 \begin_inset space ~
17176 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17180 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17184 \begin_layout Description
17186 \begin_inset space ~
17189 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17193 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17194 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17198 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17199 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17202 \begin_layout Standard
17206 \begin_inset space ~
17215 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17216 works without problems.
17217 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17218 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17222 \begin_inset space ~
17230 \begin_inset space ~
17235 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17243 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17245 \begin_inset Index idx
17248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17249 FileFormats ! XHTML
17255 \begin_inset Index idx
17258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17267 \begin_layout Standard
17268 This file type has the extension
17269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17281 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17282 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17283 When \SpecialChar LyX
17284 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17285 suitable for the purpose.
17286 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17288 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17289 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17292 between different formats, which are described in section
17294 Math Output in XHTML
17299 \begin_inset space ~
17307 \begin_layout Standard
17308 XHTML output remains
17309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17316 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17317 features are supported yet.
17321 and the World Wide Web
17325 Additional Features
17327 manual, for more information.
17330 \begin_layout Standard
17331 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17333 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17334 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17340 \begin_layout Subsection
17342 \begin_inset Index idx
17345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17354 \begin_layout Standard
17355 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17356 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17365 or use the toolbar button
17372 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17373 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17374 \begin_inset space ~
17378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17380 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17384 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17386 \begin_inset space ~
17390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17392 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17397 Further output formats can be selected via
17399 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17400 View (Other Formats)
17402 or the toolbar button
17411 \begin_layout Standard
17412 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17413 viewer window using the menu
17415 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17420 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17421 Update (Other Formats)
17426 \begin_layout Standard
17427 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17430 To have a real output, export your document.
17433 \begin_layout Section
17434 A few Words about Typography
17435 \begin_inset Index idx
17438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17447 \begin_layout Subsection
17448 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17449 \begin_inset Index idx
17452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17459 \begin_inset Index idx
17462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17471 \begin_layout Standard
17472 In \SpecialChar LyX
17474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17485 symbol comes in four variants: the
17502 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17508 \begin_layout Standard
17509 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17519 height_special "totalheight"
17524 backgroundcolor "none"
17527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17528 \begin_inset Tabular
17529 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17530 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17531 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17532 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17533 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17534 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17535 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17563 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17564 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17603 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17604 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17626 system key combination
17630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17631 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17643 and the em dash with
17646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17659 is the Mac label for the right
17670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17683 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17684 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17706 system key combination or
17707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17721 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17734 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17773 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17779 \begin_layout Standard
17780 Dashes can also be inserted with
17782 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17784 \begin_inset space ~
17787 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17795 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17796 and 2014 for the en dash).
17799 \begin_layout Standard
17800 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17801 mode and has a length of its own.
17802 Here are some examples:
17805 \begin_layout Enumerate
17806 line- and page-breaks
17807 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17817 \begin_layout Enumerate
17819 \begin_inset space ~
17823 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17833 \begin_layout Enumerate
17834 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17835 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17845 \begin_layout Enumerate
17846 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17850 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17860 \begin_layout Standard
17862 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17864 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17865 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17873 \begin_layout Subsection
17874 Dashes and Line Breaks
17875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17877 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17884 \begin_layout Standard
17885 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17886 case and locale, e.
17887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17893 \begin_layout Itemize
17894 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17895 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17898 \begin_layout Itemize
17899 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17903 \begin_layout Itemize
17904 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17905 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17908 \begin_layout Standard
17909 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17910 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17921 allows line breaks after hyphens
17922 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
17924 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
17927 en-dashes and em-dashes.
17930 \begin_layout Enumerate
17931 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
17932 \begin_inset space ~
17935 – common in British English and generally recommended by
17937 The Elements of Typographic Style
17940 \begin_inset space ~
17943 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
17946 \begin_layout Enumerate
17947 Unwanted line breaks
17952 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
17954 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
17957 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
17961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17964 Prevent Hyphenation
17969 \begin_inset space ~
17985 in \SpecialChar TeX
17987 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
17988 , a protected space does not suffice
17992 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
17997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17999 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18000 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18001 in the document language.
18002 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18016 \begin_layout Itemize
18018 \begin_inset space ~
18022 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18032 height_special "totalheight"
18037 backgroundcolor "none"
18040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18049 \begin_layout Itemize
18051 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18061 height_special "totalheight"
18066 backgroundcolor "none"
18069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18071 \begin_inset space ~
18079 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18080 \begin_inset space ~
18083 – sont très utiles.
18086 \begin_layout Itemize
18091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18100 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18104 \begin_layout Standard
18105 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18106 \begin_inset space ~
18109 – in contrast to an overfull line
18110 \begin_inset space ~
18113 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18117 \begin_layout Standard
18118 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18121 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18122 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18123 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18124 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18129 \begin_layout Enumerate
18130 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18131 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18132 or \SpecialChar TeX
18138 \begin_layout Itemize
18140 \begin_inset space ~
18143 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18144 \begin_inset space ~
18147 – sont très utiles.
18151 \begin_layout Enumerate
18152 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18153 \begin_inset Newline newline
18158 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18159 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18160 Optional line break
18166 \begin_layout Itemize
18167 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18168 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18169 should be followed by
18170 a line break opportunity.
18173 \begin_layout Standard
18174 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18175 \begin_inset space ~
18179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18181 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18192 \begin_layout Enumerate
18193 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18194 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18195 or en dashes (see section
18196 \begin_inset space ~
18200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18202 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18213 Changes and backwards compatibility
18216 \begin_layout Standard
18217 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18219 \begin_inset space ~
18222 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18223 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18232 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18233 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18241 \begin_layout Standard
18242 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18244 \begin_inset space ~
18247 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18249 prevents ligation to dashes.
18251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18258 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18263 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18264 after the input (unless the current text font is
18272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18273 The behavior was changed since
18274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18289 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18290 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18291 as non-breakable dashes.
18292 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18301 \begin_layout Standard
18304 \begin_inset space ~
18312 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18314 \begin_inset space ~
18317 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18320 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18321 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18322 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18323 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18325 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18329 If you used both literal and
18330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18337 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18339 \begin_inset space ~
18342 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18343 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18346 \begin_layout Subsection
18348 \begin_inset Index idx
18351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18358 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18360 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18367 \begin_layout Standard
18368 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18369 but automatically in the output.
18370 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18376 \begin_inset Index idx
18379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18386 following the rules of the document language.
18388 does not hyphenate text in the
18392 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18395 \begin_layout Standard
18397 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18401 font and with unusual constructs, like
18402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18410 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18411 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18412 This is done with the menu
18414 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18415 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18417 \begin_inset space ~
18423 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18425 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18429 \begin_layout Standard
18430 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18431 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18442 would then see the hyphen
18443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18450 as a line break possibility.
18451 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18452 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18455 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18456 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18459 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18461 Prevent Hyphenation
18466 \begin_inset space ~
18474 \begin_layout Subsection
18476 \begin_inset Index idx
18479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18488 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18489 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18492 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18499 \begin_layout Standard
18500 When \SpecialChar LyX
18501 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18502 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18504 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18510 appropriate amount of space.
18511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18514 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18516 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18517 gets after another word.
18520 \begin_layout Standard
18521 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18522 not work in all cases.
18524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18535 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18536 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18539 \begin_layout Standard
18540 Here are some examples of
18544 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18547 \begin_layout Itemize
18552 \begin_layout Itemize
18557 \begin_layout Standard
18558 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18561 \begin_layout Itemize
18563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18567 this is too much space!
18570 \begin_layout Itemize
18575 \begin_layout Standard
18576 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18579 \begin_layout Standard
18580 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18583 \begin_layout Enumerate
18587 \begin_inset space ~
18592 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18593 \begin_inset space ~
18597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18599 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18604 \begin_inset Index idx
18607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18608 Spaces ! inter-word
18616 \begin_layout Enumerate
18620 \begin_inset space ~
18625 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18626 \begin_inset space ~
18630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18632 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18637 \begin_inset Index idx
18640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18649 \begin_layout Enumerate
18653 \begin_inset space ~
18657 \begin_inset space ~
18661 \begin_inset space ~
18668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18670 \begin_inset space ~
18675 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18676 This function is also bound to
18679 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18685 \begin_layout Standard
18686 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18689 \begin_layout Itemize
18691 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18695 \begin_inset space \space{}
18698 this is too much space!
18701 \begin_layout Itemize
18702 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18706 \begin_layout Standard
18707 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18708 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18710 will take care of this.
18713 \begin_layout Standard
18714 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18718 \begin_inset space ~
18724 feature described in the section
18726 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18731 Additional Features
18736 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18738 \begin_inset Index idx
18741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18742 Typography ! Quotation marks
18748 \begin_inset Index idx
18751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18752 Quotation marks | see
18756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18782 \begin_layout Standard
18784 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18785 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18786 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18796 The keyboard character,
18800 , generates this automatically.
18803 \begin_layout Standard
18804 You can specify what character the
18808 key produces by using the submenu
18814 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18818 \begin_inset Index idx
18821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18822 Document ! Settings
18827 dialog and switching the
18831 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18832 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18834 \begin_inset space ~
18840 \begin_layout Labeling
18841 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18853 \begin_inset space ~
18857 \begin_inset space ~
18861 \begin_inset Quotes els
18865 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18879 \begin_inset Quotes els
18883 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18886 quotation marks (as common, e.
18887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18893 \begin_layout Labeling
18894 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18897 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18901 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18905 \begin_inset space ~
18909 \begin_inset space ~
18913 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18917 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18923 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18927 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18931 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18935 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18938 quotation marks (as common, e.
18939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18945 \begin_layout Labeling
18946 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18949 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18953 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18957 \begin_inset space ~
18961 \begin_inset space ~
18965 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18969 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18975 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18979 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18983 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18987 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18990 quotation marks (as common, e.
18991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18997 \begin_layout Labeling
18998 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19001 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19005 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19009 \begin_inset space ~
19013 \begin_inset space ~
19017 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19021 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19027 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19031 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19035 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19039 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19042 quotation marks (as common, e.
19043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19049 \begin_layout Labeling
19050 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19053 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19057 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19061 \begin_inset space ~
19065 \begin_inset space ~
19069 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19073 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19079 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19083 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19087 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19091 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19094 quotation marks (as common, e.
19095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19098 g., in Switzerland)
19101 \begin_layout Labeling
19102 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19105 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19109 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19113 \begin_inset space ~
19117 \begin_inset space ~
19121 \begin_inset Quotes als
19125 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19131 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19135 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19139 \begin_inset Quotes als
19143 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19146 quotation marks (as common, e.
19147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19153 \begin_layout Labeling
19154 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19157 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19161 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19165 \begin_inset space ~
19169 \begin_inset space ~
19173 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19177 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19183 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19187 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19191 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19195 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19198 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19201 \begin_layout Labeling
19202 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19205 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19209 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19213 \begin_inset space ~
19217 \begin_inset space ~
19221 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19225 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19231 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19235 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19239 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19243 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19246 quotation marks (as common, e.
19247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19250 g., in Great Britain)
19253 \begin_layout Labeling
19254 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19257 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19261 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19265 \begin_inset space ~
19269 \begin_inset space ~
19273 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19277 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19283 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19287 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19291 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19295 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19298 quotation marks (as common, e.
19299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19305 \begin_layout Labeling
19306 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19309 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19313 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19317 \begin_inset space ~
19321 \begin_inset space ~
19325 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19329 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19335 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19339 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19343 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19347 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19350 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19355 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19356 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19357 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19358 the inner marks differ).
19366 \begin_layout Labeling
19367 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19370 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19374 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19378 \begin_inset space ~
19382 \begin_inset space ~
19386 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19390 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19396 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19400 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19404 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19408 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19411 quotation marks (as common, e.
19412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19418 \begin_layout Labeling
19419 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19422 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19426 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19430 \begin_inset space ~
19434 \begin_inset space ~
19438 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19442 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19448 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19452 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19456 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19460 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19463 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19466 \begin_layout Labeling
19467 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19468 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19476 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19482 \begin_inset space ~
19486 \begin_inset space ~
19492 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19500 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19504 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19508 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19512 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19516 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19519 quotation marks (as common, e.
19520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19528 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19529 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19537 \begin_layout Labeling
19538 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19539 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19547 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19553 \begin_inset space ~
19557 \begin_inset space ~
19563 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19571 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19575 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19579 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19583 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19587 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19590 quotation marks (as common, e.
19591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19594 g., in North Korea and China)
19598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19599 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19600 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19608 \begin_layout Standard
19609 Inner quotation marks
19613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19614 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19615 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19616 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19624 does not necessarily mean
19625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19633 This is why we call them
19634 \begin_inset Quotes els
19638 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19654 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19656 \begin_inset Quotes els
19660 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19663 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19666 arg "quote-insert inner"
19671 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19677 \begin_layout Standard
19678 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19679 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19680 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19681 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19682 If you check the setting
19684 Use dynamic quotation marks
19688 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19689 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19692 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19693 they appear in a special color).
19694 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19695 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19700 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19703 \begin_layout Standard
19704 Individual quotation marks (i.
19705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19708 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19709 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19713 \begin_layout Subsection
19715 \begin_inset Index idx
19718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19719 Typography ! Ligatures
19725 \begin_inset Index idx
19728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19759 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19766 \begin_layout Standard
19767 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19768 print them as single characters.
19769 These groups are known as
19774 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19775 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19777 Here are the standard ligatures:
19780 \begin_layout Itemize
19784 \begin_layout Itemize
19788 \begin_layout Itemize
19792 \begin_layout Itemize
19796 \begin_layout Itemize
19800 \begin_layout Standard
19801 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19804 \begin_layout Standard
19805 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19806 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19814 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19830 To break a ligature, use
19832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19833 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19835 \begin_inset space ~
19842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19853 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19870 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19878 \begin_layout Subsection
19880 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19882 \begin_inset Index idx
19885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19895 \begin_layout Standard
19898 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19899 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19903 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19906 \begin_layout Description
19908 The name of the game.
19911 \begin_layout Description
19913 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19917 \begin_layout Description
19919 The \SpecialChar TeX
19920 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19924 \begin_layout Description
19925 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19926 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19930 \begin_layout Standard
19931 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19937 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19945 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19946 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19947 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19948 converges to the number
19949 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19952 : The actual version is
19953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19961 , the previous one was
19962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19973 \begin_layout Subsection
19975 \begin_inset Index idx
19978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19987 \begin_layout Standard
19988 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19989 space between two words.
19990 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20000 for units use the menu
20002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20003 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20005 \begin_inset space ~
20013 arg "space-insert thin"
20019 \begin_layout Standard
20020 Here is an example to show the differences:
20023 \begin_layout Standard
20024 \begin_inset Tabular
20025 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20026 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20027 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20028 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20035 \begin_inset space ~
20039 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20051 space between number and unit
20058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20067 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 half space between number and unit
20092 \begin_layout Subsection
20094 \begin_inset Index idx
20097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20098 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20106 \begin_layout Standard
20107 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20109 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20110 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20111 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20112 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20113 These bits of text became known as
20124 \begin_layout Standard
20125 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20126 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20127 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20128 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20129 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20130 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20131 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20132 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20133 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20134 \begin_inset Newline newline
20142 \begin_inset Newline newline
20150 \begin_inset Newline newline
20153 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20154 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20155 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20157 \begin_inset space ~
20161 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20163 key "latexcompanion"
20169 \begin_inset space ~
20173 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20180 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20181 's page break mechanism.
20184 \begin_layout Chapter
20185 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20188 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20195 \begin_layout Standard
20196 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20199 \begin_inset space ~
20205 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20208 \begin_layout Section
20210 \begin_inset Index idx
20213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20229 \begin_layout Standard
20231 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20234 \begin_layout Description
20237 \begin_inset space ~
20240 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20241 \begin_inset Newline newline
20245 \begin_inset Note Note
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20249 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20257 \begin_layout Description
20258 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20259 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20260 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20263 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20264 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20266 \begin_inset space ~
20272 \begin_inset Newline newline
20276 \begin_inset Note Comment
20279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20280 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20289 \begin_layout Description
20291 \begin_inset space ~
20294 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20295 set in the document settings under
20297 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20299 \begin_inset space ~
20305 \begin_inset Newline newline
20309 \begin_inset Newline newline
20313 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20322 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20323 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20328 of a comment that appears in the output.
20334 \begin_inset Newline newline
20338 \begin_inset Newline newline
20341 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20344 \begin_layout Standard
20345 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20353 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20357 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20360 \begin_layout Section
20362 \begin_inset Index idx
20365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20374 name "sec:Footnotes"
20381 \begin_layout Standard
20383 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20386 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20389 or the toolbar button
20392 arg "footnote-insert"
20404 \begin_inset Graphics
20405 filename clipart/footnote.png
20414 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20415 's representation of your footnote.
20425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20444 label, the box will
20448 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20449 Clicking on the box label again will close
20462 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20463 and click on the footnote
20478 \begin_layout Standard
20479 Here is an example footnote:
20487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20488 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20496 \begin_layout Standard
20497 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20498 position where the footnote box is placed.
20499 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20500 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20501 according to the document class.
20503 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20504 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20510 ey are described in the
20513 \begin_inset space ~
20521 \begin_layout Section
20523 \begin_inset Index idx
20526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20535 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20542 \begin_layout Standard
20543 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20545 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20547 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20549 \begin_inset space ~
20554 or the toolbar button
20557 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20583 appearing within your text.
20584 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20585 's representation of your margin
20594 \begin_layout Standard
20595 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20599 \begin_inset Marginal
20602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20604 This is a marginal note.
20612 \begin_layout Standard
20613 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20614 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20615 pages, right on odd pages.
20618 \begin_layout Standard
20619 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20622 \begin_inset space ~
20630 \begin_inset space ~
20638 \begin_layout Section
20639 Graphics and Images
20640 \begin_inset Index idx
20643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 \begin_inset Index idx
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20662 name "sec:Graphics"
20669 \begin_layout Standard
20670 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20671 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20674 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20683 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20686 \begin_layout Standard
20687 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20692 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20693 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20695 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20696 \begin_inset space ~
20700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20702 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20709 \begin_layout Standard
20714 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20715 of the image in the output.
20716 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20720 \begin_inset space ~
20724 \begin_inset space ~
20733 \begin_inset space ~
20737 \begin_inset space ~
20741 \begin_inset space ~
20746 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20747 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20755 \begin_layout Standard
20759 \begin_inset space ~
20763 \begin_inset space ~
20768 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20769 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20771 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20776 \begin_inset space ~
20781 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20782 with the image size is printed.
20785 \begin_layout Standard
20786 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20787 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20789 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20792 \begin_layout Standard
20794 \begin_inset Graphics
20795 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20803 \begin_layout Standard
20804 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20805 the image into a float, see section
20806 \begin_inset space ~
20810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20812 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20819 \begin_layout Subsection
20821 \begin_inset Index idx
20824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20833 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20840 \begin_layout Standard
20841 You can insert images in any known file format.
20842 But as we explained in section
20843 \begin_inset space ~
20847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20849 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20853 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20855 therefore uses the program
20859 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20860 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20861 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20862 \begin_inset space ~
20866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20868 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20875 \begin_layout Standard
20876 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20879 \begin_layout Description
20881 \begin_inset space ~
20884 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20885 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20886 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20890 Graphics Interchange Format
20891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20894 (GIF, file extension
20895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20907 \begin_inset Index idx
20910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20942 Portable Network Graphics
20943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20946 (PNG, file extension
20947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20959 \begin_inset Index idx
20962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20994 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20998 (JPG, file extension
20999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21023 \begin_inset Index idx
21026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21057 \begin_layout Description
21059 \begin_inset space ~
21062 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21064 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21065 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21066 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21067 \begin_inset Newline newline
21070 Scalable image formats can be
21071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21074 Scalable Vector Graphics
21075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21078 (SVG, file extension
21079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21091 \begin_inset Index idx
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21126 Encapsulated PostScript
21127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21130 (EPS, file extension
21131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21143 \begin_inset Index idx
21146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21178 Portable Document Format
21179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21182 (PDF, file extension
21183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21195 \begin_inset Index idx
21198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21213 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21214 result will not be scalable.
21215 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21221 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21229 \begin_layout Standard
21230 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21237 \begin_layout Subsection
21238 Grouping of Image Settings
21239 \begin_inset Index idx
21242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21243 Images ! Settings grouping
21251 \begin_layout Standard
21252 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21254 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21255 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21257 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21258 need to manually change each of them.
21262 \begin_layout Standard
21263 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21266 \begin_inset space ~
21270 \begin_inset space ~
21282 \begin_inset space ~
21286 \begin_inset space ~
21292 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21293 and checking the name of the desired group.
21296 \begin_layout Section
21298 \begin_inset Index idx
21301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21317 \begin_layout Standard
21318 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21321 arg "tabular-insert"
21326 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21330 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21331 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21332 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21335 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21336 from the rest of the table.
21337 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21338 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21340 Here is an example table:
21343 \begin_layout Standard
21345 \begin_inset Tabular
21346 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21347 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21348 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21349 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21350 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21351 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21553 \begin_layout Standard
21555 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21556 This corresponds to the
21557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21564 table style listed in the style selection.
21567 \begin_layout Standard
21569 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21570 Other available styles include:
21573 \begin_layout Itemize
21575 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21584 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21588 \begin_layout Itemize
21590 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21591 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21594 \begin_layout Itemize
21596 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21605 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21606 bold top/bottom lines (see
21617 \begin_layout Standard
21619 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21620 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21621 button can be changed in
21623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21624 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21628 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21632 \begin_layout Subsection
21636 \begin_layout Standard
21637 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21640 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21644 This brings up the table dialog.
21645 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21646 cursor is placed currently.
21647 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21648 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21649 done on all of your selection.
21652 \begin_layout Standard
21653 In addition to the table dialog, the
21656 \begin_inset space ~
21661 helps you in setting table properties.
21662 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21665 \begin_layout Standard
21669 \begin_inset space ~
21674 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21675 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21676 current cell respectively.
21677 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21679 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21680 of text, see section
21681 \begin_inset space ~
21685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21687 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21694 \begin_layout Standard
21695 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21696 using the check box
21705 This will merge the cells to
21709 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21710 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21711 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21712 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21713 in the last row without the upper border:
21716 \begin_layout Standard
21718 \begin_inset Tabular
21719 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21720 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21721 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21722 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21723 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21724 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21735 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21744 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21820 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21855 \begin_layout Standard
21856 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21857 -arguments for the table.
21858 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21859 explained in the chapter
21866 \begin_inset space ~
21872 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21873 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21874 but are visible in the output.
21877 \begin_layout Standard
21878 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21886 Most DVI-viewers are
21890 able to display rotations.
21898 \begin_layout Standard
21903 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21908 adds lines for all cell borders.
21911 \begin_layout Subsection
21913 \begin_inset Index idx
21916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21917 Tables ! Multi-page
21923 \begin_inset Index idx
21926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21935 \begin_layout Standard
21936 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21939 \begin_inset space ~
21943 \begin_inset space ~
21951 \begin_inset space ~
21956 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21957 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21960 \begin_layout Description
21965 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21966 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21967 Except for the first page, if
21970 \begin_inset space ~
21978 \begin_layout Description
21982 \begin_inset space ~
21987 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21988 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21991 \begin_layout Description
21996 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21997 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21998 except for the last page, if
22001 \begin_inset space ~
22009 \begin_layout Description
22013 \begin_inset space ~
22018 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22019 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22022 \begin_layout Description
22023 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22024 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22026 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22030 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22033 \begin_inset space ~
22041 \begin_layout Standard
22042 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22043 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22044 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22050 In this context, first means first in this order:
22053 \begin_inset space ~
22065 \begin_inset space ~
22070 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22073 \begin_layout Standard
22075 \begin_inset Tabular
22076 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22077 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22078 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22079 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22080 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22081 <row endfirsthead="true">
22082 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22088 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22093 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22102 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22112 <row endfirsthead="true">
22113 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22124 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22133 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22145 <row endhead="true">
22146 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22157 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22166 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22176 <row endhead="true">
22177 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22188 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22197 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22209 <row endfoot="true">
22210 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22230 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22261 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23202 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23211 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23220 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23231 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23262 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23293 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23324 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23355 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23386 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23417 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23448 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23479 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23510 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23541 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23572 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23603 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23634 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23665 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23696 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23727 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23758 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23789 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23820 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23851 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23882 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23913 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23944 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23975 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24006 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24037 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24068 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24099 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24130 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24161 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24191 <row endlastfoot="true">
24192 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24203 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24212 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24229 \begin_layout Subsection
24231 \begin_inset Index idx
24234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24243 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24250 \begin_layout Standard
24251 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24252 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24253 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24254 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24258 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24261 \begin_layout Standard
24262 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24263 for the column in the table dialog.
24264 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24265 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24269 \begin_layout Standard
24271 \begin_inset Tabular
24272 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24273 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24274 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24275 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24276 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24296 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24365 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24421 This is longer now.
24426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24477 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24478 This is longer now.
24483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24509 \begin_layout Standard
24510 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24511 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24516 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24517 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24523 Selection with the mouse or with
24527 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24528 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24529 the selection from outside the table.
24532 \begin_layout Section
24534 \begin_inset Index idx
24537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24553 \begin_layout Subsection
24557 \begin_layout Standard
24558 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24559 have a fixed location.
24561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24568 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24576 \begin_inset space ~
24581 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24582 too many notes on the current page.
24585 \begin_layout Standard
24586 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24587 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24588 and pages without text.
24589 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24590 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24591 Floats are therefore numbered.
24592 Referencing is described in section
24593 \begin_inset space ~
24597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24599 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24606 \begin_layout Standard
24607 To insert a float, use the menu
24609 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24613 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24614 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24616 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24617 \begin_inset Index idx
24620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24626 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24627 paragraph within the float.
24628 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24629 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24630 left-clicking on the box label.
24631 A closed float box looks like this:
24632 \begin_inset Graphics
24633 filename clipart/float.png
24638 – a gray button with a red label.
24641 \begin_layout Standard
24642 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24644 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24647 \begin_layout Subsection
24649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24651 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24656 \begin_inset Index idx
24659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24660 Floats ! Figure floats
24668 \begin_layout Standard
24670 \begin_inset space ~
24674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24676 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24680 was created using the menu
24682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24683 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24689 arg "float-insert figure"
24693 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24696 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24702 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24706 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24707 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24709 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24711 \begin_inset space ~
24719 arg "layout-paragraph"
24725 \begin_layout Standard
24726 \begin_inset Float figure
24733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24735 \begin_inset Graphics
24736 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24746 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24751 name "fig:A-star-in"
24768 \begin_layout Standard
24769 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24770 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24781 ) and refer to it using the menu
24783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24789 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24793 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24794 vague references like
24795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24802 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24803 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24813 For more about cross-references, see section
24814 \begin_inset space ~
24818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24820 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24827 \begin_layout Standard
24828 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24829 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24830 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24831 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24832 as described in section
24833 \begin_inset space ~
24837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24839 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24845 \begin_inset space ~
24849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24851 reference "fig:Two-images"
24855 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24856 You can also set the images one below the other.
24858 \begin_inset space ~
24862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24864 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24871 reference "fig:Star"
24875 are the subfigures.
24878 \begin_layout Standard
24879 \begin_inset Float figure
24886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24887 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24891 \begin_inset Float figure
24898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24899 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24904 name "fig:Undefinable"
24916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24917 \begin_inset Graphics
24918 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24930 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24934 \begin_inset Float figure
24941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24942 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24960 \begin_inset Graphics
24961 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24973 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24980 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24985 name "fig:Two-images"
25002 \begin_layout Subsection
25004 \begin_inset Index idx
25007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25008 Floats ! Table floats
25016 \begin_layout Standard
25017 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25019 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25020 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25023 or the toolbar button
25026 arg "float-insert table"
25030 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25031 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25032 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25034 \begin_inset space ~
25038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25040 reference "tab:Table-float"
25047 \begin_layout Standard
25048 \begin_inset Float table
25055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25056 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25061 name "tab:Table-float"
25073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25075 \begin_inset Tabular
25076 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25077 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25078 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25079 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25080 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25207 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25228 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25231 \end{array}\right]$
25239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25252 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25273 \begin_layout Subsection
25275 \begin_inset Index idx
25278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25287 \begin_layout Standard
25289 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25290 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25291 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25293 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25301 \begin_inset space ~
25309 \begin_layout Section
25311 \begin_inset Index idx
25314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25323 \begin_layout Standard
25325 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25327 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25328 \begin_inset space \space{}
25335 \begin_layout Standard
25336 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25337 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25339 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25343 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25344 and its alignment within the page.
25347 \begin_layout Standard
25349 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25359 height_special "totalheight"
25364 backgroundcolor "none"
25367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25370 This is a minipage.
25371 The text is set in an italic style.
25374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25377 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25378 another formatting.
25386 \begin_layout Standard
25387 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25390 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25394 as described in section
25395 \begin_inset space ~
25399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25401 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25406 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25412 \begin_layout Standard
25413 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25423 height_special "totalheight"
25428 backgroundcolor "none"
25431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25432 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25433 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25439 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25443 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25453 height_special "totalheight"
25458 backgroundcolor "none"
25461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25462 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25463 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25471 \begin_layout Standard
25472 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25478 \begin_layout Standard
25479 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25481 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25488 \begin_inset space ~
25496 \begin_layout Chapter
25497 Mathematical Formulas
25498 \begin_inset Index idx
25501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25508 \begin_inset Index idx
25511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25542 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25549 \begin_layout Standard
25550 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25555 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25558 \begin_layout Section
25560 \begin_inset Index idx
25563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25572 \begin_layout Standard
25573 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25586 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25588 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25589 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25590 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25598 \begin_layout Standard
25599 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25603 \begin_inset space ~
25608 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25611 \begin_layout Standard
25612 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25613 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25616 \begin_layout Standard
25617 This is a line with an inline formula
25618 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25624 \begin_layout Standard
25625 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25626 paragraph, like this one:
25627 \begin_inset Formula
25634 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25637 \begin_layout Standard
25639 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25641 For example, typing
25642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25655 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25656 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25660 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25663 \begin_inset space ~
25671 \begin_layout Subsection
25672 Navigating in Formulas
25673 \begin_inset Index idx
25676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25685 \begin_layout Standard
25686 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25687 achieved with the arrow keys.
25689 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25690 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25695 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25696 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25700 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25704 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25707 \end{array}\right]$
25715 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25720 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25721 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25724 \begin_layout Standard
25729 , printed in this document as
25730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25734 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25741 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25742 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25743 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25748 For example, if you want
25749 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25757 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25767 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25771 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25776 , since in the latter case only the
25779 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25784 will be under the square root sign:
25785 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25791 \begin_layout Standard
25792 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25794 \begin_inset Formula
25796 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25805 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25806 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25809 \begin_layout Subsection
25813 \begin_layout Standard
25814 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25815 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25819 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25820 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25821 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25822 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25823 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25827 \begin_layout Subsection
25828 Exponents and Subscripts
25829 \begin_inset Index idx
25832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25839 \begin_inset Index idx
25842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25851 \begin_layout Standard
25852 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25855 arg "math-superscript"
25861 arg "math-subscript"
25864 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25866 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25869 , type in a formula
25872 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25882 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25888 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25892 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25898 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25904 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25913 , you have to use an extra
25917 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25918 For example, if you want
25919 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25925 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25931 Subscripts are similar: To get
25932 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25938 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25946 \begin_layout Subsection
25948 \begin_inset Index idx
25951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25960 \begin_layout Standard
25961 Create a fraction either with the command
25967 or by using the icon
25970 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25976 \begin_inset space ~
25982 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25983 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25984 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25989 To move back up, press
25994 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25995 \begin_inset Formula
25997 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26000 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26008 \begin_layout Subsection
26010 \begin_inset Index idx
26013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26022 \begin_layout Standard
26023 Roots can be created using the
26026 \begin_inset space ~
26034 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26040 arg "math-insert \\root"
26062 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26068 always produces a square root.
26071 \begin_layout Subsection
26072 Operators with Limits
26073 \begin_inset Index idx
26076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26083 \begin_inset Index idx
26086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26095 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26102 \begin_layout Standard
26104 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26108 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26111 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26112 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26113 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26114 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26115 The sum operator will automatically place its
26116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26123 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26125 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26129 \begin_inset Formula
26131 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26136 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26140 \begin_layout Standard
26141 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26143 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26144 behind the operator and using the menu
26146 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26147 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26149 \begin_inset space ~
26153 \begin_inset space ~
26167 \begin_layout Standard
26168 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26177 \begin_inset Index idx
26180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26187 \begin_inset Formula
26189 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26194 which will place the
26195 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26207 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26208 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26214 \begin_layout Standard
26215 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26222 Have a look at section
26223 \begin_inset space ~
26227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26229 reference "subsec:Functions"
26233 for an explanation of function macros.
26236 \begin_layout Subsection
26238 \begin_inset Index idx
26241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26250 \begin_layout Standard
26251 Most math symbols can be found in the
26254 \begin_inset space ~
26259 under one of several categories; including
26276 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26280 \begin_layout Standard
26281 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26282 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26283 don't have to use the
26286 \begin_inset space ~
26291 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26293 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26296 \begin_layout Subsection
26298 \begin_inset Index idx
26301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26310 \begin_layout Standard
26311 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26317 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26323 \begin_inset space ~
26331 arg "math-insert \\space"
26335 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26336 For example, the sequence
26341 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26344 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26346 \begin_inset Graphics
26347 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26352 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26353 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26354 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26355 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26356 , because they are negative
26358 Here are two examples:
26361 \begin_layout Standard
26371 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26377 \begin_layout Standard
26387 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26393 \begin_layout Subsection
26395 \begin_inset Index idx
26398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26407 name "subsec:Functions"
26414 \begin_layout Standard
26418 \begin_inset space ~
26423 contains under the button
26426 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26429 a number of function macros, such as
26430 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26434 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26442 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26449 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26450 avoid confusions, because
26451 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26455 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26461 \begin_layout Standard
26462 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26464 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26468 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26474 \begin_layout Standard
26475 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26476 are placed, as described in section
26477 \begin_inset space ~
26481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26483 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26490 \begin_layout Subsection
26492 \begin_inset Index idx
26495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26504 \begin_layout Standard
26505 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26507 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26508 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26509 commands, for example, to enter
26510 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26513 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26514 Our example is entered by typing
26519 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26526 \begin_inset space ~
26530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26532 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26536 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26539 \begin_layout Standard
26540 \begin_inset Float table
26547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26548 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26553 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26557 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26567 \begin_inset Tabular
26568 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26569 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26570 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26571 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26572 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26656 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26710 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26764 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26818 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26872 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26926 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26980 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27034 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27088 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27133 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27154 \begin_layout Standard
27155 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27158 \begin_inset space ~
27166 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27169 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27173 \begin_layout Section
27174 Brackets and Delimiters
27175 \begin_inset Index idx
27178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27185 \begin_inset Index idx
27188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27197 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27204 \begin_layout Standard
27205 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27207 For some purposes, using just the keys
27212 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27213 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27214 toolbar delimiter icon
27217 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27221 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27222 \begin_inset Formula
27224 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27232 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27233 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27237 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27240 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27246 \begin_inset Formula
27248 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27256 \begin_layout Standard
27257 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27258 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27262 \begin_layout Standard
27263 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27264 left side and right side.
27265 If you use the option
27268 \begin_inset space ~
27273 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27274 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27276 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27281 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27282 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27285 \begin_layout Standard
27286 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27287 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27288 is to go inside the brackets.
27289 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27294 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27295 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27296 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27300 arg "math-delim ( )"
27306 \begin_layout Section
27307 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27308 \begin_inset Index idx
27311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27318 \begin_inset Index idx
27321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27328 \begin_inset Index idx
27331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27332 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27340 \begin_layout Standard
27341 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27345 \begin_inset space ~
27353 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27357 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27358 Here is an example:
27359 \begin_inset Formula
27361 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27370 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27371 \begin_inset space ~
27375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27377 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27382 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27383 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27384 This alignment is set in the box
27389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27438 for every column as default.
27439 For example, the sequence
27440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27451 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27452 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27453 corresponds to the relevant column.
27454 The result will look like this:
27455 \begin_inset Formula
27458 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27459 column & has & has\,right\\
27460 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27469 \begin_layout Standard
27470 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27473 arg "newline-insert newline"
27476 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27477 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27479 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27482 or the math toolbar.
27485 \begin_layout Standard
27486 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27487 It can be created with the menu
27489 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27490 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27492 \begin_inset space ~
27504 Here is an example:
27505 \begin_inset Formula
27519 \begin_layout Standard
27520 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27523 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27526 arg "newline-insert newline"
27530 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27535 arg "newline-insert newline"
27538 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27546 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27547 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27548 A new row is created by every further entry of
27551 arg "newline-insert newline"
27555 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27556 Here is an example:
27557 \begin_inset Formula
27559 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27560 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27565 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27566 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27567 \begin_inset Formula
27569 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27577 \begin_layout Standard
27578 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27585 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27586 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27589 reference "eq:asquared"
27594 The other types are described in section
27595 \begin_inset space ~
27599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27601 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27608 \begin_layout Section
27609 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27610 \begin_inset Index idx
27613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27614 Math ! Formula numbering
27620 \begin_inset Index idx
27623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27624 Math ! Referencing formulas
27630 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27632 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27639 \begin_layout Standard
27640 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27642 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27643 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27645 \begin_inset space ~
27649 \begin_inset space ~
27657 arg "math-number-toggle"
27661 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27662 within parentheses.
27663 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27664 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27665 the document class.
27666 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27667 separated by a dot:
27668 \begin_inset Formula
27678 arg "math-number-toggle"
27681 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27682 You can only number displayed formulas.
27685 \begin_layout Standard
27686 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27688 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27689 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27691 \begin_inset space ~
27695 \begin_inset space ~
27703 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27706 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27707 \begin_inset Formula
27710 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27716 To number all lines use the shortcut
27719 arg "math-number-toggle"
27725 \begin_layout Standard
27726 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27729 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27730 A label is inserted with the menu
27732 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27741 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27742 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27743 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27755 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27756 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27757 We inserted in the following example the label
27758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27765 in the second line:
27766 \begin_inset Formula
27768 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27769 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27774 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27775 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27776 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27778 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27780 \begin_inset space ~
27788 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27792 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27793 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27794 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27795 as the formula number:
27798 \begin_layout Standard
27799 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27802 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27809 \begin_layout Standard
27810 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27811 's cross-reference box are described in section
27812 \begin_inset space ~
27816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27818 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27823 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27831 \begin_layout Section
27832 User defined math macros
27833 \begin_inset Index idx
27836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27845 \begin_layout Standard
27847 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27848 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27849 Math macros are explained in section
27852 \begin_inset space ~
27864 \begin_layout Section
27868 \begin_layout Subsection
27870 \begin_inset Index idx
27873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27882 \begin_layout Standard
27883 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27884 To set a font in a formula, use the
27887 \begin_inset space ~
27895 arg "math-insert \\font"
27898 , or enter its command, listed in table
27899 \begin_inset space ~
27903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27905 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27912 \begin_layout Standard
27913 \begin_inset Float table
27920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27921 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27926 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27930 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
27938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27940 \begin_inset Tabular
27941 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27942 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27943 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27944 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27976 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28003 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28030 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28063 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28090 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28117 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28151 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28178 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28212 \begin_layout Standard
28213 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28221 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28237 \begin_layout Standard
28238 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28239 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28244 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28245 space when you need a space in the box.
28246 Here is an example where
28247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28258 denotes the set of numbers:
28259 \begin_inset Formula
28261 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28269 \begin_layout Standard
28270 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28271 You can, for example, put a character in
28280 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28284 \begin_inset Newline newline
28287 So it is better not to use this feature.
28290 \begin_layout Standard
28291 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28292 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28296 \begin_inset Newline newline
28299 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28305 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28306 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28312 \begin_layout Standard
28319 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28322 \begin_layout Standard
28323 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28325 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28326 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28328 \begin_inset space ~
28336 \begin_layout Subsection
28338 \begin_inset Index idx
28341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28350 \begin_layout Standard
28351 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28353 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28357 \begin_inset space ~
28361 \begin_inset space ~
28369 \begin_inset space ~
28377 arg "math-insert \\font"
28381 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28382 in black instead of blue.
28383 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28384 Here is an example:
28385 \begin_inset Formula
28388 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28389 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28398 \begin_layout Subsection
28400 \begin_inset Index idx
28403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28412 \begin_layout Standard
28413 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28414 automatically chosen in most situations.
28432 For most characters,
28440 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28441 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28446 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28447 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28448 thinks are appropriate.
28449 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28452 arg "math-insert \\style"
28456 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28457 For example, you can set
28458 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28461 , which is normally in
28470 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28474 The four styles are used in the following example:
28477 \begin_layout Standard
28478 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28482 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28486 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28490 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28496 \begin_layout Standard
28497 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28498 is set in a particular size with the menu
28500 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28502 \begin_inset space ~
28507 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28508 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28509 will be adjusted to correspond.
28510 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28521 \begin_layout Standard
28525 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28531 \begin_layout Section
28532 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28534 \begin_inset Index idx
28537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28544 \begin_inset Index idx
28547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28556 \begin_layout Standard
28558 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28559 that are in common use.
28562 \begin_layout Subsection
28563 Enabling AMS-Support
28566 \begin_layout Standard
28567 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28568 the document by selecting the checkbox
28571 \begin_inset space ~
28575 \begin_inset space ~
28579 \begin_inset space ~
28586 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28590 \begin_inset Index idx
28593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28594 Document ! Settings
28602 \begin_inset space ~
28608 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28609 -errors in formulas,
28610 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28613 \begin_layout Subsection
28615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28617 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28622 \begin_inset Index idx
28625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28626 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28634 \begin_layout Standard
28635 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28636 provides a selection of different formula types.
28638 allows you to choose between
28659 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28660 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28667 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28670 \begin_layout Chapter
28674 \begin_layout Section
28676 \begin_inset Index idx
28679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28688 name "sec:Cross-References"
28695 \begin_layout Standard
28696 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28697 's strengths is cross-references.
28698 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28700 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28701 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28702 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28705 \begin_layout Enumerate
28709 \begin_layout Enumerate
28710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28712 name "enu:Second-item"
28719 \begin_layout Enumerate
28723 \begin_layout Standard
28724 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28726 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28729 or by pressing the toolbar button
28736 A gray label box like this:
28737 \begin_inset Graphics
28738 filename clipart/label.png
28742 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28744 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28779 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28780 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28796 \begin_layout Standard
28797 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28799 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28802 or the toolbar button
28805 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28809 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28810 \begin_inset Graphics
28811 filename clipart/reference.png
28815 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28817 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28830 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28834 \begin_layout Standard
28835 As an alternative to
28837 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28840 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28845 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28846 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28848 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28860 \begin_layout Standard
28861 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28862 \begin_inset space ~
28866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28868 reference "enu:Second-item"
28875 \begin_layout Standard
28876 It is recommended to use a protected space
28880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28881 described in section
28882 \begin_inset space ~
28886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28888 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28897 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28898 line breaks between them.
28901 \begin_layout Standard
28902 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28905 \begin_layout Description
28906 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28909 reference "fig:Two-images"
28916 \begin_layout Description
28917 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28918 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28930 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28937 \begin_layout Description
28938 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28939 \begin_inset space ~
28943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28944 LatexCommand pageref
28945 reference "fig:Two-images"
28952 \begin_layout Description
28954 \begin_inset space ~
28958 \begin_inset space ~
28961 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
28962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28963 LatexCommand vpageref
28964 reference "fig:Two-images"
28969 \begin_inset Newline newline
28972 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28973 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28974 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28975 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28976 it prints “on the next page”.
28977 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28980 \begin_layout Description
28982 \begin_inset space ~
28986 \begin_inset space ~
28990 \begin_inset space ~
28993 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28996 reference "fig:Two-images"
29001 \begin_inset Newline newline
29004 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29010 ; otherwise it behaves like
29014 \begin_inset space ~
29018 \begin_inset space ~
29027 \begin_layout Description
29029 \begin_inset space ~
29032 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29033 \begin_inset Newline newline
29037 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29045 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29055 \begin_inset Index idx
29058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29060 packages ! prettyref
29066 \begin_inset Index idx
29069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29071 packages ! refstyle
29082 \begin_inset Newline newline
29085 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29086 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29089 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29093 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29094 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29102 is the default and preferred because
29106 supports only English documents.
29107 The format is specified by using the command
29119 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29120 preamble of the document.
29121 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29139 \begin_inset Newline newline
29146 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29151 \begin_inset Newline newline
29162 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29163 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29165 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29166 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29171 , you might do so as follows:
29172 \begin_inset Newline newline
29179 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29184 \begin_inset Newline newline
29187 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29188 the package documentation
29189 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29191 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29197 \begin_inset Newline newline
29208 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29215 \begin_layout Description
29217 \begin_inset space ~
29220 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29222 LatexCommand nameref
29223 reference "fig:Two-images"
29230 \begin_layout Description
29232 \begin_inset space ~
29235 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29236 label for the reference:
29237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29238 LatexCommand labelonly
29239 reference "fig:Two-images"
29244 \begin_inset Newline newline
29247 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29248 Code, if you want to issue a command
29249 that \SpecialChar LyX
29255 , then you may want to use the
29258 \begin_inset space ~
29263 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29273 This is the form needed for e.
29274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29278 \begin_inset space \space{}
29285 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29286 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29288 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29292 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29296 \begin_layout Standard
29297 You can only use the style
29301 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29305 is always possible.
29308 \begin_layout Standard
29309 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29310 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29312 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29313 \begin_inset space ~
29317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29319 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29326 \begin_layout Standard
29327 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29331 \begin_inset space ~
29335 \begin_inset space ~
29340 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29341 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29344 \begin_inset space ~
29349 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29350 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29353 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29359 \begin_layout Standard
29360 You can change labels at any time.
29361 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29362 do not need to think about this.
29365 \begin_layout Standard
29366 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29368 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29372 \begin_layout Standard
29373 References are described in detail in the section
29374 \begin_inset space ~
29384 \begin_inset space ~
29392 \begin_layout Section
29393 Table of Contents and other Listings
29394 \begin_inset Index idx
29397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29404 \begin_inset Index idx
29407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29408 Navigating ! Outline
29414 \begin_inset Index idx
29417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29433 \begin_layout Subsection
29435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29437 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29444 \begin_layout Standard
29445 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29447 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29448 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29450 \begin_inset space ~
29454 \begin_inset space ~
29460 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29462 If you click on it, the
29466 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29467 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29468 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29470 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29472 \begin_inset space ~
29477 that is described in section
29478 \begin_inset space ~
29482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29484 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29491 \begin_layout Standard
29492 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29493 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29495 \begin_inset space ~
29499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29501 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29505 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29507 \begin_inset space ~
29511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29513 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29517 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29519 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29522 \begin_layout Subsection
29523 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29526 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29533 \begin_layout Standard
29534 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29536 You can insert them via the
29538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29542 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29545 \begin_layout Section
29546 URLs and Hyperlinks
29547 \begin_inset Index idx
29550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29557 \begin_inset Index idx
29560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29569 \begin_layout Subsection
29571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29580 \begin_layout Standard
29581 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29583 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29589 \begin_layout Standard
29590 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29592 \begin_inset Flex URL
29595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29597 https://www.lyx.org
29605 \begin_layout Standard
29606 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29612 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29616 \begin_layout Standard
29617 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29625 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29634 \begin_layout Subsection
29636 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29638 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29645 \begin_layout Standard
29646 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29648 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29651 or with the toolbar button
29658 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29667 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29668 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29669 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29671 name "LyX's homepage"
29672 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29677 , an Email address like this:
29678 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29680 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29681 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29687 , or a link to a file.
29692 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29700 \begin_layout Standard
29701 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29714 to the link target.
29717 \begin_layout Standard
29718 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29719 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29720 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29721 the text style dialog.
29722 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29726 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29728 name "LyX's homepage"
29729 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29737 \begin_layout Standard
29738 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29742 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29744 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29745 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29749 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29751 \begin_inset Newline newline
29759 \begin_inset Newline newline
29766 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29769 \begin_layout Section
29771 \begin_inset Index idx
29774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29783 name "sec:Appendices"
29790 \begin_layout Standard
29791 Appendices are created with the menu
29793 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29795 \begin_inset space ~
29799 \begin_inset space ~
29805 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29806 as the appendix part of the book.
29807 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29810 \begin_layout Standard
29811 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29812 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29813 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29814 and the subsection number.
29815 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29819 \begin_layout Standard
29821 \begin_inset space ~
29825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29827 reference "chap:Credits"
29832 \begin_inset space ~
29836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29838 reference "subsec:Export"
29845 \begin_layout Section
29847 \begin_inset Index idx
29850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29859 name "sec:Bibliography"
29866 \begin_layout Standard
29867 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29869 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29870 \begin_inset space ~
29874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29876 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29883 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29888 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29889 \begin_inset space ~
29893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29895 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29900 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29901 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29902 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29906 using a bibliography database.
29909 \begin_layout Standard
29910 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29911 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29915 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29916 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29917 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29918 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29919 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29922 \begin_layout Subsection
29923 The Bibliography Environment
29924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29926 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29933 \begin_layout Standard
29938 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29940 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29949 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29951 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29952 of ASCII characters only.
29956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29958 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29961 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29967 \begin_inset Newline newline
29971 \begin_inset Flex URL
29974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29976 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
29986 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29996 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29997 \begin_inset Newline newline
30004 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30005 the number of the entry.
30010 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30019 \begin_layout Standard
30020 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30022 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30025 or the toolbar button
30028 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30032 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30033 containing the available citations.
30034 Select one or more keys from the list and
30044 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30045 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30049 \begin_layout Standard
30050 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30051 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30052 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30064 \begin_layout Standard
30068 Companion Second Edition
30071 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30073 key "latexcompanion"
30081 \begin_layout Standard
30082 The \SpecialChar LyX
30083 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30084 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30094 \begin_layout Standard
30095 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30102 \begin_inset Index idx
30105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30114 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30115 the label needs to be given the form
30116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30127 Author A and Author B(Year)
30128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30135 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30142 \begin_inset space ~
30147 in the document settings
30148 \begin_inset Index idx
30151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30152 Document ! Settings
30159 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30161 \begin_inset space ~
30167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30169 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30177 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30179 Once you have done that, the
30183 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30200 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30201 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30202 These two are madatory.
30203 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30206 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30208 ) and in abrreviated form (
30215 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30216 add the abbreviated form to
30220 and the full list to the optional
30228 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30229 If specified like this,
30231 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30232 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30242 is specified, toggling
30243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30250 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30251 full and abbreviated list
30255 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30256 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30257 the citation references.
30258 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30263 \begin_layout Standard
30264 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30267 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30269 \begin_inset space ~
30277 arg "layout-paragraph"
30281 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30284 \begin_layout Subsection
30285 Bibliography databases
30286 \begin_inset Index idx
30289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30290 Bibliography ! Databases
30296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30298 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30305 \begin_layout Standard
30306 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30312 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30314 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30315 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30320 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30322 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30323 your working field in a database.
30324 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30325 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30326 list for that document.
30327 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30331 \begin_layout Standard
30332 The database is a text file with the file extension
30333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30344 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30345 The format is explained in
30346 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30353 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30355 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30357 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30363 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30364 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30365 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30367 \begin_inset Flex URL
30370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30372 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30380 \begin_layout Standard
30382 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30383 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30384 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30386 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30388 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30389 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30390 Those are addressed by
30395 \begin_inset Index idx
30398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30400 packages ! biblatex
30406 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30407 (although it has been significantly
30408 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30418 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30419 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30420 might conversely fail to correctly
30421 handle databases that use specific
30430 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30434 \begin_layout Standard
30435 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30440 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30442 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30446 \begin_inset Index idx
30449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30450 Document ! Settings
30462 \begin_inset space ~
30467 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30475 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30476 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30478 \begin_inset Index idx
30481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30482 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30491 \begin_layout Standard
30492 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30495 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30500 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30502 \begin_inset space ~
30508 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30509 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30517 Add bibliography to TOC
30519 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30524 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30525 in the document or just the cited references.
30527 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30532 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30533 differ from the encoding of the document.
30538 \begin_layout Standard
30539 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30540 style file is a text file with the file extension
30541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30552 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30553 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30554 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30555 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30557 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30563 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30564 \begin_inset Newline newline
30568 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30570 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30580 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30585 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30589 \begin_layout Standard
30590 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30593 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30595 \begin_inset Index idx
30598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30599 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30605 \begin_inset Index idx
30608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30610 packages ! biblatex
30618 \begin_layout Standard
30619 Accessing a database via
30623 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30626 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30631 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30633 \begin_inset space ~
30639 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30640 you cannot select a
30645 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30649 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30652 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30653 As for the styles, note the following.
30658 \begin_layout Standard
30663 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30676 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30677 file (text file with the file extension
30678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30689 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30690 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30692 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30696 \begin_layout Standard
30701 styles are not set in the
30704 \begin_inset space ~
30709 dialog, but in the document settings.
30710 \begin_inset Index idx
30713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30714 Document ! Settings
30719 However, in the dialog in the
30723 field, which is only visible if you use
30727 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30728 example how its heading will appear).
30729 These options are described in detail in the
30734 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30744 \begin_layout Standard
30745 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30746 \begin_inset space ~
30750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30752 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30762 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30763 Bibliography Processors
30766 \begin_layout Standard
30767 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30768 uses a bibliography processor,
30769 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30770 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30771 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30773 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30774 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30777 \begin_layout Standard
30778 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30780 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30781 You can do this on a general level in
30783 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30784 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30785 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30788 or for individual documents in
30790 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30791 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30795 The following variants are available by default:
30798 \begin_layout Description
30799 biber a specific, modern processor
30800 \begin_inset Index idx
30803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30810 developed exclusively for
30814 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30820 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30825 makes use of; if you use the
30829 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30836 \begin_layout Description
30837 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30838 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30839 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30843 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30846 \begin_layout Description
30847 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30848 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30852 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30856 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30860 features are supported.
30863 \begin_layout Standard
30864 By default (with the
30870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30871 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30884 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30885 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30886 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30889 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30890 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30903 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30904 -based bibliography styles).
30905 This should suit most needs.
30908 \begin_layout Standard
30909 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30910 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30911 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30916 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30917 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30918 You can adjust it in
30920 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30921 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30922 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30928 \begin_layout Standard
30929 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30930 can add below the selection.
30931 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30932 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30938 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30948 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30952 \begin_layout Standard
30954 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
30956 These are explained in detail in section
30958 Customizing Bibliographies
30962 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30967 Additional Features
30972 \begin_layout Subsection
30974 \begin_inset Index idx
30977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30978 Bibliography ! Citation format
30984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30986 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
30993 \begin_layout Standard
30994 Many different citation formats are common, e.
30995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30999 \begin_inset space \space{}
31002 numerical citation (as
31003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31010 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31018 ) or author-year citations (as
31019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31028 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31032 \begin_layout Standard
31033 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31036 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31037 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31041 \begin_inset Index idx
31044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31045 Document ! Settings
31050 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31056 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31057 labels, is there to use
31060 \begin_inset space ~
31071 \begin_inset space ~
31076 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31079 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31086 \begin_layout Standard
31087 With a bibliography database (see
31088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31090 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31097 ) one has in contrary to the
31101 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31102 These style formats are available:
31105 \begin_layout Description
31107 \begin_inset space ~
31110 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31111 -based approached without any additional packages
31112 (simple numeric citations).
31115 \begin_layout Description
31116 Biblatex loads the package
31121 \begin_inset Index idx
31124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31126 packages ! biblatex
31131 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31133 Biblatex citation style
31137 Biblatex bibliography style
31140 Options to the package
31144 can be entered in the
31151 \begin_layout Description
31153 \begin_inset space ~
31157 \begin_inset space ~
31160 mode) loads the package
31164 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31165 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31177 behavior very closely.
31182 this option has some additional styles.
31187 styles are also supported by this variant.
31190 \begin_layout Description
31192 \begin_inset space ~
31195 (BibTeX) loads the package
31200 \begin_inset Index idx
31203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31210 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31213 \begin_layout Description
31215 \begin_inset space ~
31218 (BibTeX) loads the package
31223 \begin_inset Index idx
31226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31233 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31236 \begin_layout Standard
31245 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31247 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31256 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31258 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31259 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31261 Biblatex citation style
31264 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31270 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31274 \begin_layout Standard
31275 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31276 are available in the
31281 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31282 a name prefix such as
31283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31298 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31303 \begin_inset space \space{}
31307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31318 \begin_layout Standard
31319 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31325 \begin_inset space \space{}
31328 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31334 \begin_inset space \space{}
31338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31350 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31354 \begin_inset space ~
31362 \begin_inset space ~
31368 Here is a simple example where the text
31369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31373 \begin_inset space ~
31377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31380 appears after the reference:
31383 \begin_layout Quote
31385 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31388 key "latexcompanion"
31396 \begin_layout Standard
31397 All styles except for
31401 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31411 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31415 \begin_layout Standard
31416 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31417 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31418 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31423 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31424 multi-citation (so-called
31425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31428 qualified citation lists
31429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31435 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31440 dialog will display three columns in the field
31447 \begin_inset space ~
31455 \begin_inset space ~
31463 \begin_inset space ~
31469 If you double-click on an item's
31472 \begin_inset space ~
31480 \begin_inset space ~
31485 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31488 General text before
31494 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31497 \begin_layout Section
31499 \begin_inset Index idx
31502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31518 \begin_layout Standard
31519 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31521 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31523 \begin_inset space ~
31528 or the toolbar button
31535 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31536 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31537 by \SpecialChar LyX
31538 as the index entry.
31541 \begin_layout Standard
31542 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31544 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31545 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31547 \begin_inset space ~
31553 A light blue box labeled
31554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31565 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31566 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31570 \begin_layout Standard
31571 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31572 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31573 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31574 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31576 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31578 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31586 \begin_layout Subsection
31587 Grouping Index Entries
31588 \begin_inset Index idx
31591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31600 \begin_layout Standard
31601 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31603 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31604 lists under the entry
31605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31613 First we create the entry
31614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31622 \begin_inset space ~
31626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31628 reference "subsec:Lists"
31633 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31634 \begin_inset space ~
31638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31640 reference "sec:Itemize"
31644 , we insert the command
31647 \begin_layout Standard
31653 \begin_layout Standard
31657 \begin_layout Standard
31663 \begin_layout Standard
31664 for the enumerated list in section
31665 \begin_inset space ~
31669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31671 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31678 \begin_layout Standard
31679 The exclamation mark
31680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31687 marks the grouping levels.
31688 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31689 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31690 If we don't have an index entry for
31691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31698 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31701 \begin_layout Subsection
31703 \begin_inset Index idx
31706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31707 Index ! Page ranges
31715 \begin_layout Standard
31716 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31718 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31719 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31720 an index entry in section
31721 \begin_inset space ~
31725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31727 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31734 \begin_layout Standard
31737 Paragraph environments|(
31740 \begin_layout Standard
31741 and another entry at the end of section
31742 \begin_inset space ~
31746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31748 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31755 \begin_layout Standard
31758 Paragraph environments|)
31761 \begin_layout Standard
31763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31786 respectively start and end the index range.
31787 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31788 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31789 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31790 An example is the index entry
31791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31794 Document ! Settings
31795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31801 \begin_layout Subsection
31803 \begin_inset Index idx
31806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31807 Index ! Cross referencing
31815 \begin_layout Standard
31816 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31817 We referred for example in the index entry
31818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31826 \begin_inset space ~
31830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31832 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31836 ) to the index entry
31837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31844 in the same section using the entry
31847 \begin_layout Standard
31850 GIF|see{Image formats}
31853 \begin_layout Standard
31854 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31856 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31857 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31860 \begin_layout Subsection
31862 \begin_inset Index idx
31865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31866 Index ! Entry order
31874 \begin_layout Standard
31875 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31876 follow the rules for the index order.
31877 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31883 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31885 \begin_inset space ~
31889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31891 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31900 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31901 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31926 \begin_inset Index idx
31929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31930 Dummy entries ! maïs
31936 \begin_inset Index idx
31939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31940 Dummy entries ! maître
31946 \begin_inset Index idx
31949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31950 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
31955 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
31956 maïs, maison, maître.
31957 To achieve this, we use the command
31960 \begin_layout Standard
31963 previous entry@current entry
31966 \begin_layout Standard
31967 In our case we want to have
31968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31983 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
31986 \begin_layout Standard
31992 \begin_layout Standard
31993 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
31994 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
31996 See the next subsection for an example.
31999 \begin_layout Subsection
32001 \begin_inset Index idx
32004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32005 Index ! Entry layout
32013 \begin_layout Standard
32014 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32015 \begin_inset Index idx
32018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32021 This is an italic dummy entry
32026 You can also format the page number using the character
32027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32034 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32035 -command without a backslash.
32036 We can write for example
32039 \begin_layout Standard
32042 italic page number:|textit
32045 \begin_layout Standard
32046 to get the page number in italic.
32047 \begin_inset Index idx
32050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32051 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32056 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32057 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32075 \begin_inset space ~
32081 Have a look at section
32082 \begin_inset space ~
32086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32088 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32092 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32096 \begin_layout Standard
32097 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32105 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32109 to generate the index, see section
32110 \begin_inset space ~
32114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32116 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32125 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32130 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32131 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32134 key "latexcompanion"
32147 \begin_layout Standard
32148 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32150 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32151 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32152 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32153 If so, put the following in the preamble
32156 \begin_layout Standard
32168 \begin_layout Standard
32172 \begin_layout Standard
32178 \begin_layout Standard
32179 in the index entry.
32180 \begin_inset Index idx
32183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32184 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32189 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32190 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32191 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32194 \begin_layout Standard
32195 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32196 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32197 a bold font for all index entries.
32198 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32210 documentation for details,
32211 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32213 key "makeindex,xindy"
32221 \begin_layout Subsection
32223 \begin_inset Index idx
32226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32235 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32242 \begin_layout Standard
32243 If the index generation program
32247 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32248 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32252 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32253 distribution, is used.
32257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32262 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32263 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32264 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32265 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32266 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32276 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32278 dialog, see section
32279 \begin_inset space ~
32283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32285 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32290 The available options are listed and explained in
32291 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32293 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32299 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32303 \begin_layout Standard
32304 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32305 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32308 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32309 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32313 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32314 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32317 \begin_layout Subsection
32321 \begin_layout Standard
32322 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32323 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32331 next to the standard index.
32333 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32334 that add this feature.
32341 \begin_inset Index idx
32344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32346 packages ! splitidx
32351 package to generate multiple indexes.
32352 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32358 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32360 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32368 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32369 style, but it also includes
32370 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32371 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32379 \begin_layout Standard
32380 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32381 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32383 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32384 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32387 and select the option
32389 Use multiple Indexes
32396 already contains the standard index
32397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32405 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32406 also appear as a heading) to the
32410 input field and press the
32415 The new index now also appears in the list.
32416 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32417 label color to the new index.
32420 \begin_layout Standard
32421 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32424 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32431 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32432 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32433 are additional features:
32436 \begin_layout Itemize
32437 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32438 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32441 \begin_layout Itemize
32442 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32443 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32448 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32449 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32450 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32451 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32454 \begin_layout Itemize
32459 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32460 code in the name of the index.
32463 \begin_layout Section
32464 Nomenclature/Glossary
32465 \begin_inset Index idx
32468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32475 \begin_inset Index idx
32478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32509 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32516 \begin_layout Standard
32517 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32518 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32519 called nomenclature or glossary.
32522 \begin_layout Standard
32523 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32530 \begin_inset Index idx
32533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32541 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32543 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32550 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32554 \begin_layout Standard
32555 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32556 and then use the menu
32558 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32564 \begin_inset space ~
32569 or the toolbar button
32572 arg "nomencl-insert"
32577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32588 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32591 \begin_layout Standard
32592 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32593 The first is the term or
32597 that you wish to define.
32602 of the term or symbol.
32605 \begin_layout Standard
32606 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32614 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32615 code for nomenclature entries the option
32619 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32627 \begin_layout Subsection
32628 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32629 \begin_inset Index idx
32632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32633 Nomenclature ! Layout
32641 \begin_layout Standard
32642 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32646 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32653 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32661 \begin_inset Newline newline
32669 \begin_inset Newline newline
32675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32682 character starts/ends the formula.
32683 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32684 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32696 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32706 \begin_layout Standard
32707 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32708 syntax is given in section
32709 \begin_inset space ~
32713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32715 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32722 \begin_layout Standard
32726 \begin_inset space ~
32731 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32733 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32738 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32745 in this document is:
32746 \begin_inset Newline newline
32751 dummy entry for the character
32756 \begin_inset Newline newline
32768 \begin_inset space ~
32778 font use the command
32807 \begin_layout Standard
32808 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32813 \begin_inset space \space{}
32817 \begin_inset Newline newline
32833 \begin_inset Newline newline
32836 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32837 This command will make the font of all symbols
32844 \begin_inset space ~
32852 \begin_layout Standard
32853 If the characters |
32854 \begin_inset space \space{}
32858 \begin_inset space \space{}
32862 \begin_inset space \space{}
32866 \begin_inset space \space{}
32870 \begin_inset space \space{}
32873 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32874 code they need to be escaped
32875 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32876 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32877 LatexCommand nomenclature
32878 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32879 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32887 \begin_layout Subsection
32888 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32889 \begin_inset Index idx
32892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32893 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32901 \begin_layout Standard
32902 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32903 -code of the symbol
32905 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32907 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32910 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32911 LatexCommand nomenclature
32913 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32921 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32925 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32926 LatexCommand nomenclature
32929 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32935 They will be sorted by
32936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32962 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32965 will be sorted before the
32969 since the character
32970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32977 is considered in sorting.
32980 \begin_layout Standard
32981 To control the sort order, you can edit the
32984 \begin_inset space ~
32989 field of the nomenclature dialog.
32990 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
32992 For the example given, you can insert
32996 in this field for the
32997 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33004 will be located before
33005 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33011 \begin_layout Standard
33012 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33017 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33027 \begin_layout Subsection
33028 Nomenclature Options
33029 \begin_inset Index idx
33032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33033 Nomenclature ! Options
33039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33041 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33048 \begin_layout Standard
33053 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33054 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33057 \begin_layout Description
33058 refeq Appends the phrase
33059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33074 to every nomenclature entry, where
33080 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33083 \begin_layout Description
33084 refpage Appends the phrase
33085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33100 to every nomenclature entry, where
33106 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33109 \begin_layout Description
33110 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33113 \begin_layout Standard
33114 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33115 class options list in the
33117 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33121 In this document the options
33128 \begin_layout Standard
33129 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33135 \begin_layout Standard
33136 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33137 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33142 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33145 \begin_layout Description
33155 \begin_layout Description
33158 nomrefpage Like the
33165 \begin_layout Description
33168 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33177 \begin_layout Description
33181 \begin_inset space ~
33187 \begin_inset space ~
33192 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33195 \begin_layout Standard
33197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33204 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33205 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33209 \begin_layout Standard
33218 \begin_inset Newline newline
33224 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33228 \begin_inset space ~
33240 unskip, see equation
33243 \begin_inset Newline newline
33250 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33251 \begin_inset Newline newline
33257 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33261 \begin_inset space ~
33278 \begin_layout Standard
33279 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33282 \begin_inset space ~
33287 in the document settings under
33290 \begin_inset space ~
33298 \begin_layout Standard
33306 \begin_inset Newline newline
33310 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33314 \begin_inset space ~
33326 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33328 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33329 \begin_inset Newline newline
33336 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33337 \begin_inset Newline newline
33341 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33345 \begin_inset space ~
33357 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33362 \begin_layout Subsection
33363 Printing the Nomenclature
33364 \begin_inset Index idx
33367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33368 Nomenclature ! Printing
33376 \begin_layout Standard
33377 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33379 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33380 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
33385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33396 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33397 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33398 You can choose between these settings:
33401 \begin_layout Description
33402 Default a space of 1
33403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33409 \begin_layout Description
33411 \begin_inset space ~
33415 \begin_inset space ~
33418 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33421 \begin_layout Description
33422 Custom custom space
33425 \begin_layout Standard
33426 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33435 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33443 For example, in order to change the name to
33447 , add the following line to the preamble:
33450 \begin_layout Standard
33463 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33466 \begin_layout Standard
33467 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33468 \begin_inset Newline newline
33483 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33486 \begin_layout Subsection
33487 Nomenclature Program
33488 \begin_inset Index idx
33491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33492 Nomenclature ! Program
33498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33500 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33507 \begin_layout Standard
33513 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33514 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33516 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33521 by adding options, see section
33522 \begin_inset space ~
33526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33528 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33533 The available options are listed and explained in
33534 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33536 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33544 \begin_layout Section
33546 \begin_inset Index idx
33549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33556 \begin_inset Index idx
33559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33560 Document ! Branches
33566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33568 name "sec:Branches"
33575 \begin_layout Standard
33576 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33577 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33578 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33579 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33582 \begin_layout Standard
33583 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33584 allows you to put text into branches.
33585 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33586 To create a branch, either select the menu
33588 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33589 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33592 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33594 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33601 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33602 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33603 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33604 and whether the name of the branch should
33605 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33606 (see below for an example).
33607 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33608 to the name of the other) and to add
33609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33621 \begin_inset space ~
33624 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33625 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33628 \begin_layout Standard
33629 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33630 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33632 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33635 where you can choose a branch.
33636 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33640 \begin_layout Standard
33641 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33642 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33645 \begin_layout Standard
33646 \begin_inset Branch Question
33650 \begin_layout Standard
33655 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33663 \begin_layout Standard
33664 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33668 \begin_layout Standard
33673 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33681 \begin_layout Standard
33688 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33689 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33692 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33693 Consider for example a file
33694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33701 which has the above branches.
33703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33710 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33734 branch were inactive,
33735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33750 branch was active, likewise
33751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33766 branch was active, and
33767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33770 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33774 if both branches were active.
33775 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33776 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33782 \begin_layout Standard
33783 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33789 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33790 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33794 \begin_inset space ~
33802 \begin_layout Standard
33803 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33807 \begin_layout Standard
33813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33820 branch is deactivated.
33826 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33832 \begin_layout Standard
33833 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33834 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33835 definitions for each branch.
33836 For example you can define for the question branch
33840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33841 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33842 -syntax, see section
33843 \begin_inset space ~
33847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33849 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33861 \begin_layout Standard
33871 \begin_layout Standard
33881 \begin_layout Standard
33882 and for the answer branch
33885 \begin_layout Standard
33895 \begin_layout Standard
33905 \begin_layout Standard
33906 \begin_inset Branch Question
33910 \begin_layout Standard
33914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33942 \begin_layout Standard
33943 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33947 \begin_layout Standard
33951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33979 \begin_layout Standard
33980 Now it is possible to use the
33984 question{\SpecialChar ldots
33991 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
33994 commands to obtain conditional output.
33995 Here is an example formula where only the
34002 \begin_inset Formula
34004 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34012 \begin_layout Standard
34013 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34021 \begin_layout Standard
34022 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34028 \begin_inset space \space{}
34031 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34033 For this advanced usage, see the
34039 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34044 \begin_layout Section
34046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34048 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34053 \begin_inset Index idx
34056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34065 \begin_layout Standard
34068 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34069 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34072 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34074 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34080 \begin_inset Index idx
34083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34085 packages ! hyperref
34090 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34091 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34092 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34093 part of the document.
34097 \begin_layout Standard
34098 The header information in the dialog tab
34102 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34103 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34104 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34105 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34109 \begin_inset space ~
34113 \begin_inset space ~
34118 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34119 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34120 and author entries.
34124 \begin_inset space ~
34128 \begin_inset space ~
34132 \begin_inset space ~
34137 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34140 \begin_layout Standard
34141 You can specify in the dialog tab
34145 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34150 \begin_inset space ~
34154 \begin_inset space ~
34158 \begin_inset space ~
34163 option allows long links to be split;
34166 \begin_inset space ~
34170 \begin_inset space ~
34174 \begin_inset space ~
34182 \begin_inset space ~
34187 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34190 \begin_inset space ~
34195 colors the different links.
34196 The default colors are:
34199 \begin_layout Labeling
34200 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34205 for hyperlinks and URLs
34208 \begin_layout Labeling
34209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34217 \begin_layout Labeling
34218 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34226 \begin_layout Standard
34227 but you can change these in the field
34232 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34235 \begin_layout Standard
34238 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34241 \begin_layout Standard
34246 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34247 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34248 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34251 \begin_layout Standard
34256 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34257 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34258 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34268 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34269 when opening the PDF.
34271 \begin_inset space ~
34274 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34275 \begin_inset space ~
34278 1 will only display the sections.
34281 \begin_layout Standard
34282 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34283 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34289 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34290 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34300 \begin_layout Section
34302 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34306 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34313 \begin_layout Subsection
34316 \begin_inset Index idx
34319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34329 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34336 \begin_layout Standard
34337 As \SpecialChar LyX
34338 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34339 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34340 commands and constructs,
34343 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34344 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34345 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34346 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34347 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34348 cannot support all packages and
34352 \begin_layout Standard
34353 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34354 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34355 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34359 Code box is created by the menu
34361 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34363 \begin_inset space ~
34368 or by the toolbar button
34381 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34389 \begin_layout Standard
34390 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34392 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34394 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34399 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34404 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34411 , you can write the command part
34417 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34418 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34422 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34423 Code box behind the word.
34424 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34425 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34429 \begin_layout Standard
34430 \begin_inset Graphics
34431 filename clipart/ERT.png
34439 \begin_layout Standard
34443 \begin_layout Standard
34444 This is a line with a
34448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34471 \begin_layout Standard
34472 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34480 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34481 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34482 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34483 know that the command is finished.
34491 \begin_layout Subsection
34492 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34494 \begin_inset Argument 1
34497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34498 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34505 \begin_inset Index idx
34508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34518 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34525 \begin_layout Standard
34526 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34527 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34528 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34529 uses in the background.
34530 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34531 is based on commands, you can
34532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34540 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34541 any time if you know the right commands.
34542 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34543 is the end of the day.
34544 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34545 all caption labels bold.
34546 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34548 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34552 \begin_layout Standard
34553 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34555 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34557 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34560 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34570 \begin_layout Standard
34571 As result you find that the package
34576 \begin_inset Index idx
34579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34587 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34589 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34592 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34596 \begin_inset space ~
34604 \begin_layout Standard
34609 usepackage[options]{package name}
34612 \begin_layout Standard
34613 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34614 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34615 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34616 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34619 \begin_layout Standard
34620 In your case the package name is
34625 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34630 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34631 So you add the command
34634 \begin_layout Standard
34639 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34642 \begin_layout Standard
34643 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34648 For more commands provided by the
34652 package, have a look at its documentation,
34653 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34668 \begin_layout Standard
34669 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34671 For example if you use a
34675 class, you don't need the package
34679 , you can instead write
34682 \begin_layout Standard
34687 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34692 \begin_layout Standard
34693 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34694 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34695 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34702 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34705 \begin_layout Standard
34706 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34707 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34709 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34710 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34711 Code box as described in the previous
34715 \begin_layout Standard
34716 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34717 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34720 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34722 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34730 \begin_layout Standard
34731 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34737 \begin_layout Standard
34741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34751 \begin_inset Note Note
34754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34755 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34763 \begin_layout Left Header
34764 \begin_inset Argument 1
34767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34787 \begin_inset Note Note
34790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34791 defines the header line as described below
34799 \begin_layout Center Header
34800 \begin_inset Argument 1
34803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34812 \begin_layout Right Header
34813 \begin_inset Argument 1
34816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34837 \begin_layout Left Footer
34838 \begin_inset Argument 1
34841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34862 \begin_layout Center Footer
34863 \begin_inset Argument 1
34866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34878 \begin_inset Newline newline
34882 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34888 \begin_layout Right Footer
34889 \begin_inset Argument 1
34892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34914 \begin_layout Section
34915 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34918 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34923 \begin_inset Index idx
34926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34927 Document ! Header/Footer line
34933 \begin_inset Index idx
34936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34945 \begin_layout Standard
34946 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
34950 \begin_inset space ~
34961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34967 \begin_inset space ~
34973 As a second step add in the menu
34975 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34976 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34985 Custom Header/Footerlines
34988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34992 This module offers the following 6
34993 \begin_inset space ~
34999 \begin_layout Description
35001 \begin_inset space ~
35005 \begin_inset space ~
35009 \begin_inset space ~
35013 \begin_inset space ~
35017 \begin_inset space ~
35023 \begin_layout Description
35025 \begin_inset space ~
35029 \begin_inset space ~
35033 \begin_inset space ~
35037 \begin_inset space ~
35041 \begin_inset space ~
35047 \begin_layout Standard
35048 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35049 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35052 \begin_layout Standard
35053 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35054 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35056 \begin_inset space ~
35060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35062 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35066 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35069 \begin_layout Standard
35070 \begin_inset Float figure
35077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35080 \begin_inset Tabular
35081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35083 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35085 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35087 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35105 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35116 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35134 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35145 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35149 The normal text on the page goes here.
35150 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35152 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35153 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35158 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35167 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35178 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35196 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35207 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35225 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35243 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35248 name "fig:Page-layout"
35252 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35265 \begin_layout Standard
35266 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35274 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35278 \begin_inset space ~
35283 is set to “Default”.
35284 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35293 \begin_layout Subsection
35297 \begin_layout Standard
35298 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35299 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35300 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35301 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35303 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35305 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35308 \begin_layout Standard
35309 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35310 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35314 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35316 \begin_inset space ~
35324 \begin_layout Description
35327 thepage prints the current page number
35330 \begin_layout Description
35333 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35336 \begin_layout Description
35339 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35342 \begin_layout Description
35345 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35346 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35353 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35356 because it usually goes in a left header.
35359 \begin_layout Description
35362 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35363 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35365 It is normally used in the right header.
35368 \begin_layout Subsection
35369 Default header/footer
35372 \begin_layout Standard
35373 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35374 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35375 footer has the page number.
35376 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35377 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35378 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35381 \begin_inset space ~
35389 \begin_layout Subsection
35393 \begin_layout Standard
35394 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35395 Some pages are different.
35396 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35397 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35398 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35399 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35400 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35404 Header and footer decoration line
35407 \begin_layout Standard
35408 By default, you get a 0.4
35409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35412 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35413 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35425 in the following way:
35428 \begin_layout Standard
35435 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35438 \begin_layout Standard
35439 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35452 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35459 \begin_layout Standard
35460 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35462 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35463 \begin_inset space ~
35467 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35477 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35478 Several header/footer lines
35481 \begin_layout Standard
35482 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35483 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35484 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35486 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35501 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35502 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35504 \begin_inset space ~
35512 \begin_layout Standard
35519 headheight}{height}
35522 \begin_layout Standard
35527 is a size in standard units (e.
35528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35532 \begin_inset space \space{}
35540 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35541 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35542 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35543 logfile with the menu
35545 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35547 \begin_inset space ~
35555 \begin_inset space ~
35560 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35565 \begin_inset Index idx
35568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35570 packages ! fancyhdr
35576 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35577 for your header/footer.
35580 \begin_layout Subsection
35584 \begin_layout Standard
35585 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35586 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35587 This example consists of the following definition:
35590 \begin_layout Description
35592 \begin_inset space ~
35601 , empty optional argument
35604 \begin_layout Description
35606 \begin_inset space ~
35609 Header empty, empty optional argument
35612 \begin_layout Description
35614 \begin_inset space ~
35623 in the optional argument
35626 \begin_layout Description
35628 \begin_inset space ~
35637 in the optional argument
35640 \begin_layout Description
35642 \begin_inset space ~
35655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35659 \begin_inset Newline newline
35663 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35670 in the optional argument
35673 \begin_layout Description
35675 \begin_inset space ~
35684 , empty optional argument
35687 \begin_layout Description
35690 headrulewidth set to 2
35691 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35697 \begin_layout Standard
35698 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35699 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35705 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35715 \begin_layout Standard
35716 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35722 \begin_layout Standard
35726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35730 pagestyle{headings}
35736 \begin_inset Note Note
35739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35740 switches back to page style with the default headings
35748 \begin_layout Section
35749 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35752 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35757 \begin_inset Index idx
35760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35767 \begin_inset Index idx
35770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35779 \begin_layout Standard
35781 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35782 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35783 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35786 \begin_layout Subsection
35790 \begin_layout Standard
35791 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35797 \begin_inset Index idx
35800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35802 packages ! preview-latex
35807 (on some systems named simply
35812 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35814 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35821 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35823 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35831 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35832 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35833 -package are automatically
35834 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35838 \begin_layout Subsection
35842 \begin_layout Standard
35843 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35844 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35846 activate the option
35849 \begin_inset space ~
35856 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35862 \begin_inset space ~
35866 \begin_inset space ~
35869 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35876 \begin_inset space ~
35889 \begin_inset space ~
35894 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35897 \begin_layout Standard
35898 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35903 \begin_inset space ~
35911 \begin_inset space ~
35919 \begin_layout Standard
35920 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35921 and when you finish
35925 \begin_layout Standard
35926 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35934 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
35935 generated by activating the option
35938 \begin_inset space ~
35944 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
35952 \begin_layout Subsection
35953 Selected document parts
35956 \begin_layout Standard
35957 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
35958 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
35959 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
35960 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35962 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
35964 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35968 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
35969 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
35970 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
35973 \begin_layout Standard
35974 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35981 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35993 is explained in section
35995 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36000 \begin_inset space ~
36010 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36011 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36012 the final rotated boxes,
36013 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36014 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36016 Here is the result:
36019 \begin_layout Standard
36020 \begin_inset Preview
36022 \begin_layout Standard
36027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36031 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36037 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36047 height_special "totalheight"
36052 backgroundcolor "none"
36055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36080 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36086 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36108 \begin_layout Standard
36109 Previewing works also for colors.
36110 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36129 is explained in section
36136 \begin_inset space ~
36149 \begin_layout Standard
36150 \begin_inset Preview
36152 \begin_layout Standard
36156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36175 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36180 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36199 \begin_layout Standard
36200 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36206 \begin_layout Standard
36207 If \SpecialChar LyX
36208 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36209 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36210 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36211 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36212 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36213 the \SpecialChar TeX
36215 If \SpecialChar LyX
36216 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36217 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36219 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36220 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36221 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36224 \begin_layout Subsection
36229 \begin_layout Standard
36230 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36231 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36234 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36236 \begin_inset space ~
36241 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36243 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36245 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36246 's main window, then only this selection
36247 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36248 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36249 the source view window.
36254 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36255 ; but note that if you have
36256 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36258 not just the one which is open at the time.
36261 \begin_layout Section
36262 Advanced Find and Replace
36263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36265 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36270 \begin_inset Index idx
36273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36280 \begin_inset Index idx
36283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36292 \begin_layout Subsection
36296 \begin_layout Standard
36297 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36298 allows for searching of complex,
36299 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36301 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36302 The key-features are:
36305 \begin_layout Itemize
36306 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36307 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36308 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36312 \begin_layout Itemize
36313 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36314 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36315 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36316 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36319 \begin_layout Itemize
36320 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36321 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36322 outside of mathematics environments
36325 \begin_layout Itemize
36326 Search may be widened to a specific
36331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36335 \begin_inset space ~
36338 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36339 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36346 \begin_layout Itemize
36347 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36348 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36353 \begin_inset space ~
36356 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36359 \begin_layout Subsection
36363 \begin_layout Standard
36364 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36366 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36379 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36382 ) or the toolbar button
36385 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36391 Advanced Find and Replace
36396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36400 \begin_layout Standard
36406 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36410 \begin_inset space ~
36415 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36418 arg "paragraph-break"
36422 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36423 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36427 arg "paragraph-break"
36430 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36434 searches backwards.
36437 \begin_layout Standard
36441 \begin_inset space ~
36446 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36455 \begin_inset space ~
36460 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36464 Searching for mathematics
36467 \begin_layout Standard
36468 Mathematical formulas, such as
36469 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36472 or something more complex like
36473 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36476 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36481 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36482 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36483 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36484 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36490 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36494 \begin_layout Standard
36495 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36496 This is done by switching to the
36500 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36505 This way, entering in the
36512 \begin_layout Itemize
36513 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36514 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36517 \begin_layout Itemize
36518 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36519 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36522 \begin_layout Itemize
36523 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36524 of it only within section headings.
36525 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36526 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36530 \begin_layout Itemize
36531 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36532 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36539 \begin_layout Standard
36540 The entries made in the
36544 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36547 \begin_inset space ~
36553 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36557 button or alternatively press
36560 arg "paragraph-break"
36567 while the cursor is in the
36570 \begin_inset space ~
36578 \begin_layout Standard
36579 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36581 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36585 \begin_layout Itemize
36586 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36587 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36595 with its typewriter version
36596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36610 \begin_layout Itemize
36611 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36617 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36629 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36636 (you may want to enable the
36639 \begin_inset space ~
36647 \begin_inset space ~
36652 options and disable the
36660 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36668 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36669 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36673 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36676 , or occurrences of
36677 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36681 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36687 \begin_layout Subsection
36691 \begin_layout Standard
36692 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36697 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36699 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36701 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36711 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36717 This is done with the context menu
36719 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36720 Insert Regular Expression
36722 while the cursor is in the
36727 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36728 expression matching rules
36732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36733 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36736 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36740 \begin_inset space ~
36743 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36744 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36750 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36751 same text in the document.
36752 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36753 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36756 \begin_layout Enumerate
36757 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36762 editor the fraction
36763 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36767 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36770 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36771 fractions with the given denominator.
36774 \begin_layout Enumerate
36775 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36787 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36792 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36793 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36794 Also, by inserting a
36795 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36798 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36799 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36802 \begin_layout Standard
36803 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36804 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36805 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36808 , and referring back to them through
36809 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36813 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36817 For example, try searching with the regexp
36818 \begin_inset Newline newline
36821 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36824 \begin_inset Newline newline
36827 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36830 \begin_layout Standard
36831 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36834 \begin_layout Standard
36835 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36843 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36844 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36845 sub-expressions is absolute.
36847 \begin_inset space ~
36851 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36854 always refers to the first occurrence of
36855 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36858 in all entered regexps.
36866 \begin_layout Section
36868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36870 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36875 \begin_inset Index idx
36878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36887 \begin_layout Standard
36889 has a built-in spell checker.
36892 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36899 key or the toolbar button
36902 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36905 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36906 beginning of the currently selected text.
36907 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36908 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36909 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36910 scrolled so that it is visible.
36911 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36912 n, if any could be found.
36913 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36917 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36918 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36921 \begin_layout Standard
36922 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36925 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36929 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36930 a different one at the top of the dialog.
36932 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
36933 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
36936 \begin_inset space ~
36944 arg "dialog-show character"
36947 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
36949 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
36952 \begin_layout Standard
36953 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36954 can be downloaded from here:
36955 \begin_inset Newline newline
36959 \begin_inset Flex URL
36962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36964 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
36970 \begin_inset Newline newline
36974 \begin_inset space ~
36977 files for each language.
36978 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
36979 \begin_inset space ~
36982 files into \SpecialChar LyX
36983 's installation subfolder
36991 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36993 \begin_inset Newline newline
36996 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
36997 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
36998 but in most cases these are
37014 is the language code.
37017 \begin_layout Subsection
37021 \begin_layout Standard
37024 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37025 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37027 \begin_inset space ~
37030 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37033 you can set the following things:
37036 \begin_layout Description
37038 \begin_inset space ~
37041 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37042 should use for spell checking.
37043 Depending on your platform,
37053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37054 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37055 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37070 \begin_inset space ~
37073 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37076 \begin_layout Description
37078 \begin_inset space ~
37081 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37082 will always use the given language
37083 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37086 \begin_layout Description
37088 \begin_inset space ~
37091 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37097 \begin_inset space \space{}
37101 This should normally not be needed.
37104 \begin_layout Description
37106 \begin_inset space ~
37110 \begin_inset space ~
37113 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37125 \begin_layout Description
37127 \begin_inset space ~
37130 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37131 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37132 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37133 appear in a context menu.
37134 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37138 \begin_layout Description
37140 \begin_inset space ~
37144 \begin_inset space ~
37148 \begin_inset space ~
37151 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37155 \begin_layout Section
37157 \begin_inset Index idx
37160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37169 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37176 \begin_layout Standard
37178 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37179 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37189 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37191 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37201 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37203 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37204 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37205 which are available for many languages.
37208 \begin_layout Standard
37209 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37210 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37214 \begin_layout Subsection
37215 Setting up the thesaurus
37218 \begin_layout Standard
37227 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37231 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37236 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37242 \begin_inset space ~
37250 For instance, the US English files are named:
37253 \begin_layout Itemize
37257 \begin_layout Itemize
37261 \begin_layout Standard
37270 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37271 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37274 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37275 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37276 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37278 \begin_inset space ~
37283 ) to the path where they are installed.
37287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37288 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37289 ies, typical locations are
37295 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37299 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37303 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37306 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37312 LibreOffice-<Version>
37319 On the Mac, the default location is
37321 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37322 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37323 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37324 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37325 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37326 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37334 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37335 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37336 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37340 \begin_layout Standard
37341 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37342 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37344 \begin_inset Newline newline
37348 \begin_inset Flex URL
37351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37353 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37361 \begin_layout Standard
37362 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37363 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37365 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37366 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37367 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37369 \begin_inset space ~
37374 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37376 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37377 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37381 \begin_layout Standard
37382 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37384 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37387 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37393 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37396 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37397 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37405 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37406 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37407 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37409 \begin_inset space ~
37414 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37417 \begin_layout Subsection
37418 Using the thesaurus
37421 \begin_layout Standard
37422 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37424 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37427 or the toolbar button
37430 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37433 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37435 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37437 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37438 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37439 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37448 ), related terms (such as
37451 \begin_inset space ~
37460 ), compounds (such as
37463 \begin_inset space ~
37472 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37481 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37484 \begin_layout Standard
37485 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37486 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37490 \begin_layout Standard
37491 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37492 the dictionary, such as the above
37496 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37501 \begin_inset space \space{}
37504 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37505 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37506 For example, looking up the word form
37510 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37515 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37520 \begin_inset space \space{}
37531 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37532 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37533 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37536 \begin_layout Section
37538 \begin_inset Index idx
37541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37548 \begin_inset Index idx
37551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37552 Document ! Change Tracking
37558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37560 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37567 \begin_layout Standard
37568 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37569 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37570 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37571 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37573 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37575 \begin_inset space ~
37578 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37580 \begin_inset space ~
37588 \begin_layout Standard
37589 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37603 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37604 You can change the color in
37606 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37607 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37609 \begin_inset space ~
37613 \begin_inset space ~
37618 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37624 \begin_inset Index idx
37627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37628 Color ! Change tracking
37633 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37634 's status bar when the
37635 cursor is in changed text.
37636 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37639 arg "changes-merge"
37645 \begin_layout Standard
37646 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37648 \begin_inset Index idx
37651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37660 \begin_layout Standard
37661 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37667 \begin_layout Standard
37668 \begin_inset Graphics
37669 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37677 \begin_layout Standard
37678 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37684 \begin_layout Standard
37685 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37688 \begin_layout Standard
37689 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37695 \begin_layout Standard
37696 \begin_inset Tabular
37697 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37698 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37699 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37700 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37701 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37710 arg "changes-track"
37718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37724 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37726 \begin_inset space ~
37729 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37731 \begin_inset space ~
37740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37749 arg "changes-output"
37757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37763 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37765 \begin_inset space ~
37768 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37770 \begin_inset space ~
37774 \begin_inset space ~
37778 \begin_inset space ~
37787 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37808 Jumps to the next change
37814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37823 arg "change-accept"
37831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37839 \begin_inset space ~
37842 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37844 \begin_inset space ~
37853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37862 arg "change-reject"
37870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37876 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37878 \begin_inset space ~
37881 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37883 \begin_inset space ~
37892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37901 arg "changes-merge"
37909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37915 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37917 \begin_inset space ~
37920 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37922 \begin_inset space ~
37931 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37940 arg "all-changes-accept"
37948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37956 \begin_inset space ~
37959 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37961 \begin_inset space ~
37965 \begin_inset space ~
37974 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37983 arg "all-changes-reject"
37991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37997 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37999 \begin_inset space ~
38002 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38004 \begin_inset space ~
38008 \begin_inset space ~
38017 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38041 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38043 \begin_inset space ~
38052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38075 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38077 \begin_inset space ~
38093 \begin_layout Standard
38094 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38100 \begin_layout Standard
38101 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38121 \begin_layout Standard
38122 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38123 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38124 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38125 the next change after the current cursor position.
38126 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38127 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38128 step to the next change.
38129 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38132 \begin_layout Standard
38133 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38134 to describe a change.
38137 \begin_layout Standard
38138 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38144 \begin_inset Index idx
38147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38155 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38157 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38164 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38168 \begin_layout Section
38169 Comparison of Documents
38170 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38172 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38177 \begin_inset Index idx
38180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38181 Comparison of documents
38189 \begin_layout Standard
38190 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38193 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38197 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38198 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38200 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38202 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38206 \begin_inset space ~
38210 \begin_inset space ~
38214 \begin_inset space ~
38223 \begin_inset space ~
38227 \begin_inset space ~
38231 \begin_inset space ~
38235 \begin_inset space ~
38239 \begin_inset space ~
38243 \begin_inset space ~
38248 enables the change tracking option
38251 \begin_inset space ~
38255 \begin_inset space ~
38259 \begin_inset space ~
38264 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38267 \begin_layout Section
38268 International Support
38269 \begin_inset Index idx
38272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38273 International support
38281 \begin_layout Standard
38282 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38283 with any language you want.
38284 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38285 up \SpecialChar LyX
38287 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38289 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38297 \begin_layout Standard
38298 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38299 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38300 \begin_inset space ~
38304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38306 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38313 \begin_layout Subsection
38315 \begin_inset Index idx
38318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38325 \begin_inset Index idx
38328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38329 Document ! Settings
38335 \begin_inset Index idx
38338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38339 Document ! Language
38347 \begin_layout Standard
38350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38351 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38354 dialog lets you set
38356 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38361 \begin_layout Standard
38366 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38371 \begin_inset space ~
38376 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38377 For details about the different encoding options see section
38378 \begin_inset space ~
38382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38384 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38391 \begin_layout Subsection
38392 Keyboard mapping configuration
38393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38395 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38402 \begin_layout Standard
38403 If you have for example a U.
38404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38407 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38408 can use an alternate keymap.
38409 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38414 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38415 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38416 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38419 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38420 \begin_inset space ~
38424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38426 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38431 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38432 which one you want to use.
38435 \begin_layout Standard
38436 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38437 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38438 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38442 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38443 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38444 one to support the characters you want.
38445 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38452 \begin_layout Chapter
38455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38457 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38464 \begin_layout Standard
38465 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38466 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38467 topic inside the user's guide.
38470 \begin_layout Section
38472 \begin_inset Index idx
38475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38484 \begin_layout Standard
38489 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38492 \begin_layout Subsection
38496 \begin_layout Standard
38497 Creates a new document.
38500 \begin_layout Subsection
38504 \begin_layout Standard
38505 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38506 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38507 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38509 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38510 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38516 \begin_layout Subsection
38520 \begin_layout Standard
38524 \begin_layout Subsection
38528 \begin_layout Standard
38529 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38530 Click there on a file to open it.
38533 \begin_layout Subsection
38535 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38539 \begin_layout Standard
38541 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38542 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38546 \begin_layout Subsection
38550 \begin_layout Standard
38551 Closes the current document.
38554 \begin_layout Subsection
38558 \begin_layout Standard
38559 Closes all opened documents.
38562 \begin_layout Subsection
38566 \begin_layout Standard
38567 Saves the actual document.
38570 \begin_layout Subsection
38574 \begin_layout Standard
38575 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38576 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38580 \begin_layout Subsection
38582 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38586 \begin_layout Standard
38588 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38589 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
38595 \begin_layout Subsection
38599 \begin_layout Standard
38600 Saves all opened documents.
38603 \begin_layout Subsection
38607 \begin_layout Standard
38608 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38611 \begin_layout Subsection
38615 \begin_layout Standard
38616 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38617 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38618 It is described in the section
38620 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38625 Additional Features
38630 \begin_layout Subsection
38634 \begin_layout Standard
38635 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38636 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38638 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38639 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38643 \begin_layout Standard
38644 When using the menu entry
38647 \begin_inset space ~
38652 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38656 \begin_inset space ~
38660 \begin_inset space ~
38664 \begin_inset space ~
38669 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38670 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38673 \begin_layout Subsection
38675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38677 name "subsec:Export"
38684 \begin_layout Standard
38685 You can export your document to various file formats.
38686 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38688 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38689 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38690 during its configuration.
38693 \begin_layout Standard
38694 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38696 \begin_inset space ~
38700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38702 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38709 \begin_layout Description
38715 \begin_inset space ~
38718 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38720 \begin_inset space ~
38723 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38724 \begin_inset Newline newline
38727 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38728 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38732 \begin_layout Description
38733 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38739 \begin_layout Description
38741 \begin_inset space ~
38744 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38750 \begin_layout Description
38751 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38752 's native DVI-format.
38753 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38754 files paths or file names in your document.
38756 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38763 \begin_layout Description
38764 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
38765 in files paths or file names
38768 \begin_layout Description
38770 \begin_inset space ~
38777 ) DVI-format using the program
38779 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38782 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38786 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38794 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38802 \begin_layout Description
38804 \begin_inset space ~
38807 (cropped) the same as
38811 but with cropped page margins.
38814 \begin_layout Description
38816 \begin_inset space ~
38819 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38823 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38828 \begin_layout Description
38832 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38840 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38848 \begin_layout Description
38850 \begin_inset space ~
38854 \begin_inset space ~
38857 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38861 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38869 \begin_layout Description
38873 \begin_inset space ~
38882 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38883 source that is compilable with the program
38885 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38889 \begin_layout Description
38893 \begin_inset space ~
38898 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38899 source, additionally all images used in the document
38900 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38904 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38907 \begin_layout Description
38911 \begin_inset space ~
38916 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38917 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38918 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38926 \begin_layout Description
38930 \begin_inset space ~
38939 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38940 source that is compilable with the program
38946 \begin_layout Description
38948 \begin_inset space ~
38952 \begin_inset space ~
38959 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38960 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
38966 \begin_layout Description
38968 \begin_inset space ~
38971 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
38972 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
38974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38978 \begin_inset space \space{}
38983 \begin_inset space ~
38987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39002 represent the version number)
39005 \begin_layout Description
39007 \begin_inset space ~
39011 \begin_inset space ~
39014 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39015 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39016 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39020 \begin_layout Description
39021 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39022 's internal XHTML engine
39025 \begin_layout Description
39027 \begin_inset space ~
39031 \begin_inset space ~
39035 \begin_inset space ~
39039 \begin_inset space ~
39042 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39047 For the conversion the program
39056 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39059 \begin_layout Description
39060 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39065 \begin_layout Description
39067 \begin_inset space ~
39070 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39072 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39075 For the conversion the program
39084 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39087 \begin_layout Description
39089 \begin_inset space ~
39092 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39093 For the conversion the program
39102 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39105 \begin_layout Description
39107 \begin_inset space ~
39110 (cropped) the same as
39113 \begin_inset space ~
39118 but with cropped page margins
39121 \begin_layout Description
39125 \begin_inset space ~
39130 PDF-format using the program
39134 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39137 \begin_layout Description
39141 \begin_inset space ~
39145 \begin_inset space ~
39153 \begin_inset space ~
39158 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39163 \begin_inset space \space{}
39166 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39170 \begin_layout Description
39174 \begin_inset space ~
39179 PDF-format using the program
39181 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39184 , produces PDF-files directly
39187 \begin_layout Description
39191 \begin_inset space ~
39196 PDF-format using the program
39200 , produces PDF-files directly
39203 \begin_layout Description
39207 \begin_inset space ~
39212 PDF-format using the program
39216 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39219 \begin_layout Description
39223 \begin_inset space ~
39228 PDF-format using the program
39233 , produces PDF-files directly
39236 \begin_layout Description
39240 \begin_inset space ~
39248 \begin_layout Description
39252 \begin_inset space ~
39256 \begin_inset space ~
39261 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39262 and then exported as text using the program
39267 \begin_layout Description
39272 PostScript format using the program
39280 options see section
39281 \begin_inset space ~
39285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39287 reference "subsec:General-output"
39294 \begin_layout Description
39295 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39296 source and also code in the statistical programming
39310 it is possible to use
39314 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39318 \begin_layout Standard
39319 If one of the menu entries
39326 \begin_inset space ~
39335 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39337 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39339 \begin_inset space ~
39343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39345 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39350 \begin_inset Index idx
39353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39354 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39363 \begin_layout Subsection
39367 \begin_layout Standard
39368 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39369 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39372 \begin_inset space ~
39376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39378 reference "sec:Paths"
39383 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39392 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39393 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39394 's preferences as described in section
39395 \begin_inset space ~
39399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39401 reference "subsec:Converters"
39408 \begin_layout Subsection
39409 New and Close Window
39412 \begin_layout Standard
39413 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39417 \begin_layout Subsection
39421 \begin_layout Standard
39422 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39425 \begin_layout Section
39427 \begin_inset Index idx
39430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39439 \begin_layout Subsection
39443 \begin_layout Standard
39444 Described in section
39445 \begin_inset space ~
39449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39451 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39458 \begin_layout Subsection
39459 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39462 \begin_layout Standard
39463 Described in section
39464 \begin_inset space ~
39468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39470 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39477 \begin_layout Subsection
39481 \begin_layout Standard
39482 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39483 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39486 \begin_layout Subsection
39490 \begin_layout Standard
39491 Selects the whole document.
39494 \begin_layout Subsection
39495 Find & Replace (Quick)
39498 \begin_layout Standard
39499 Described in section
39500 \begin_inset space ~
39504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39506 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39513 \begin_layout Subsection
39514 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39517 \begin_layout Standard
39518 Described in section
39519 \begin_inset space ~
39523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39525 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39532 \begin_layout Subsection
39533 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39536 \begin_layout Standard
39537 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39541 \begin_layout Subsection
39543 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39547 \begin_layout Standard
39549 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39550 Described in section
39551 \begin_inset space ~
39555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39557 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39566 \begin_layout Subsection
39568 \begin_inset Index idx
39571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39572 Paragraph ! Settings
39580 \begin_layout Standard
39581 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39582 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39586 \begin_layout Standard
39587 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39588 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39594 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39595 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39597 \begin_inset space ~
39603 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39607 \begin_layout Subsection
39609 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39613 \begin_layout Standard
39615 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39616 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39621 \begin_layout Enumerate
39623 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39624 Customize text properties by means of the
39630 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39633 ; this is described in section
39634 \begin_inset space ~
39638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39640 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39647 \begin_layout Enumerate
39649 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39650 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39652 Apply last settings
39655 \begin_layout Enumerate
39657 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39658 Change the casing of selected text (
39673 \begin_layout Subsection
39675 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39679 \begin_layout Standard
39681 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39682 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39683 text styles (in the case of this document:
39705 \begin_inset space ~
39709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39711 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39720 \begin_layout Subsection
39721 Table and Rows & Columns
39724 \begin_layout Standard
39725 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39726 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39727 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39730 \begin_layout Subsection
39734 \begin_layout Standard
39735 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39736 It will dissolve this inset.
39737 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39741 \begin_layout Subsection
39745 \begin_layout Standard
39746 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39747 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39750 \begin_layout Subsection
39751 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39754 \begin_layout Standard
39755 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39757 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39758 \begin_inset space ~
39762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39764 reference "sec:Nesting"
39769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39771 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39778 \begin_layout Section
39780 \begin_inset Index idx
39783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39792 \begin_layout Standard
39793 At the bottom of the
39797 menu the opened documents are listed.
39800 \begin_layout Subsection
39801 Open/Close all Insets
39804 \begin_layout Standard
39805 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39808 \begin_layout Subsection
39809 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39812 \begin_layout Standard
39813 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39816 \begin_layout Standard
39817 Math macros are described in the
39824 \begin_layout Subsection
39828 \begin_layout Standard
39829 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39830 \begin_inset space ~
39834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39836 reference "sec:Navigating"
39841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39843 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39850 \begin_layout Subsection
39854 \begin_layout Standard
39855 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39857 \begin_inset space ~
39861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39863 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39870 \begin_layout Subsection
39874 \begin_layout Standard
39875 Opens a window showing console messages.
39876 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39881 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39882 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39883 is processing the document.
39886 \begin_layout Subsection
39888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39890 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39895 \begin_inset Index idx
39898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39907 \begin_layout Standard
39908 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39910 All toolbars and the
39913 \begin_inset space ~
39918 can be turned on and off.
39923 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
39935 \begin_inset space ~
39947 \begin_inset space ~
39952 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
39956 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
39963 \begin_layout Standard
39968 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
39972 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
39973 or when a certain feature is enabled.
39974 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
39975 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
39976 is inside a formula or table respectively.
39979 \begin_layout Standard
39981 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
39982 \begin_inset space ~
39986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39988 reference "sec:Toolbars"
39995 \begin_layout Subsection
39999 \begin_layout Standard
40003 \begin_inset space ~
40007 \begin_inset space ~
40011 \begin_inset space ~
40015 \begin_inset space ~
40019 \begin_inset space ~
40023 \begin_inset space ~
40028 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40029 's main window vertically while
40032 \begin_inset space ~
40036 \begin_inset space ~
40040 \begin_inset space ~
40044 \begin_inset space ~
40048 \begin_inset space ~
40052 \begin_inset space ~
40057 will split it horizontally.
40058 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40059 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40060 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40061 three or more documents at the same time.
40062 To close a split view, use the menu
40065 \begin_inset space ~
40069 \begin_inset space ~
40077 \begin_layout Subsection
40081 \begin_layout Standard
40082 Closes a split view.
40085 \begin_layout Subsection
40089 \begin_layout Standard
40090 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40091 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40092 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40093 's main window fullscreen.
40094 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40095 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40098 \begin_layout Section
40100 \begin_inset Index idx
40103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40112 \begin_layout Subsection
40116 \begin_layout Standard
40117 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40118 \begin_inset space ~
40122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40124 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40135 \begin_layout Subsection
40137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40139 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40146 \begin_layout Standard
40147 Here you can insert the following characters:
40150 \begin_layout Description
40155 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40158 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40159 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40160 -packages you have installed.
40161 You can get a complete display by checking
40164 \begin_inset space ~
40170 \begin_inset Newline newline
40174 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40182 Not all characters will be visible in the
40186 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40187 dialog (see section
40188 \begin_inset space ~
40192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40194 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40198 ) can display every character.
40206 \begin_layout Description
40207 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40211 \begin_layout Description
40213 \begin_inset space ~
40217 \begin_inset space ~
40220 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40221 \begin_inset space ~
40225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40227 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40234 \begin_layout Description
40236 \begin_inset space ~
40239 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40242 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40243 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40249 \begin_layout Description
40251 \begin_inset space ~
40254 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40257 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40258 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40264 \begin_layout Description
40266 \begin_inset space ~
40269 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40273 \begin_layout Description
40275 \begin_inset space ~
40278 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40282 \begin_layout Description
40284 \begin_inset space ~
40287 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
40293 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40299 \begin_layout Description
40301 \begin_inset space ~
40304 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40308 \begin_layout Description
40310 \begin_inset space ~
40314 \begin_inset Index idx
40317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40324 \begin_inset Index idx
40327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40328 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40333 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40334 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40336 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40342 \begin_inset Index idx
40345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40353 \begin_inset Newline newline
40356 More information about this feature can be found in the
40362 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40368 \begin_layout Description
40369 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40371 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40372 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40376 \begin_layout Subsection
40380 \begin_layout Standard
40381 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40384 \begin_layout Description
40385 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40386 \begin_inset script superscript
40388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40397 \begin_layout Description
40398 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40399 \begin_inset script subscript
40401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40410 \begin_layout Description
40412 \begin_inset space ~
40415 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40416 \begin_inset space ~
40420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40422 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40429 \begin_layout Description
40431 \begin_inset space ~
40434 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40435 \begin_inset space ~
40439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40441 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40448 \begin_layout Description
40450 \begin_inset space ~
40453 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40454 \begin_inset space ~
40458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40460 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40467 \begin_layout Description
40469 \begin_inset space ~
40472 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40474 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40478 \begin_inset space \space{}
40481 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40482 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40491 To insert a fraction use the command
40496 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40500 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40509 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40516 \begin_layout Description
40518 \begin_inset space ~
40521 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40522 \begin_inset space ~
40526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40528 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40535 \begin_layout Description
40537 \begin_inset space ~
40540 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40541 \begin_inset space ~
40545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40547 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40554 \begin_layout Description
40556 \begin_inset space ~
40559 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40560 \begin_inset space ~
40564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40566 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40573 \begin_layout Description
40574 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40575 \begin_inset space ~
40579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40581 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40588 \begin_layout Description
40590 \begin_inset space ~
40593 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40594 \begin_inset space ~
40598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40600 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40607 \begin_layout Description
40609 \begin_inset space ~
40612 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40613 \begin_inset space ~
40617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40619 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40626 \begin_layout Description
40628 \begin_inset space ~
40632 \begin_inset space ~
40635 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40638 \begin_inset space ~
40642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40644 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40651 for a usage example.
40654 \begin_layout Description
40656 \begin_inset space ~
40660 \begin_inset space ~
40663 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40664 \begin_inset space ~
40668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40670 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40677 \begin_layout Description
40679 \begin_inset space ~
40682 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40683 as described in section
40684 \begin_inset space ~
40688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40690 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40697 \begin_layout Description
40699 \begin_inset space ~
40702 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40703 \begin_inset space ~
40707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40709 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40716 \begin_layout Description
40718 \begin_inset space ~
40721 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40722 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40724 \begin_inset space ~
40728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40730 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40737 \begin_layout Description
40739 \begin_inset space ~
40742 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40743 \begin_inset space ~
40747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40749 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40756 \begin_layout Description
40758 \begin_inset space ~
40762 \begin_inset space ~
40765 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40766 \begin_inset space ~
40770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40772 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40779 \begin_layout Subsection
40781 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40785 \begin_layout Standard
40787 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40788 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40789 The submenu allows you to insert
40792 \begin_layout Description
40794 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40796 \begin_inset space ~
40799 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40802 \begin_layout Description
40804 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40806 \begin_inset space ~
40810 \begin_inset space ~
40813 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40817 \begin_layout Description
40819 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40821 \begin_inset space ~
40824 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40827 \begin_layout Description
40829 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40831 \begin_inset space ~
40834 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40837 \begin_layout Description
40839 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40841 \begin_inset space ~
40845 \begin_inset space ~
40848 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
40852 \begin_layout Description
40854 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
40856 \begin_inset space ~
40859 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
40862 \begin_layout Description
40864 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
40866 \begin_inset space ~
40870 \begin_inset space ~
40874 \begin_inset space ~
40877 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
40880 \begin_layout Description
40882 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
40884 \begin_inset space ~
40887 Name inserts the user name as specified in
40889 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40890 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40896 \begin_layout Description
40898 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
40900 \begin_inset space ~
40903 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
40905 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40906 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40912 \begin_layout Description
40914 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
40915 Other\SpecialChar ldots
40916 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
40917 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
40920 \begin_layout Subsection
40924 \begin_layout Standard
40925 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
40929 \begin_inset space ~
40950 are described in section
40951 \begin_inset space ~
40955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40957 reference "sec:toc"
40966 is described in section
40967 \begin_inset space ~
40971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40973 reference "sec:Index"
40981 is described in section
40982 \begin_inset space ~
40986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40988 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40994 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40997 is described in section
40998 \begin_inset space ~
41002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41004 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41011 \begin_layout Subsection
41015 \begin_layout Standard
41016 To insert floats, as described in section
41017 \begin_inset space ~
41021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41023 reference "sec:Floats"
41027 and in detail the chapter
41034 \begin_inset space ~
41042 \begin_layout Subsection
41046 \begin_layout Standard
41047 To insert notes, described in section
41048 \begin_inset space ~
41052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41054 reference "sec:Notes"
41061 \begin_layout Subsection
41065 \begin_layout Standard
41066 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41068 Branches are described in section
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41075 reference "sec:Branches"
41082 \begin_layout Subsection
41086 \begin_layout Standard
41087 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41088 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41090 An example is the document class
41091 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41101 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41110 with three custom insets.
41113 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41117 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41123 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41126 \begin_layout Subsection
41128 \begin_inset Index idx
41131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41140 \begin_layout Standard
41141 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41143 For more information see chapter
41145 External Document Parts
41148 \begin_inset space ~
41154 \begin_layout Subsection
41156 \begin_inset Index idx
41159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41168 \begin_layout Standard
41169 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41170 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41177 \begin_inset space ~
41185 \begin_layout Subsection
41189 \begin_layout Standard
41194 dialog as described in section
41195 \begin_inset space ~
41199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41201 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41208 \begin_layout Subsection
41212 \begin_layout Standard
41217 as described in section
41218 \begin_inset space ~
41222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41224 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41231 \begin_layout Subsection
41235 \begin_layout Standard
41240 as described in section
41241 \begin_inset space ~
41245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41247 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41254 \begin_layout Subsection
41256 \begin_inset Index idx
41259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41266 \begin_inset Index idx
41269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41270 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41278 \begin_layout Standard
41279 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41280 Floats are described in section
41281 \begin_inset space ~
41285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41287 reference "sec:Floats"
41291 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41293 Multi-page Captions
41298 \begin_inset space ~
41306 \begin_layout Subsection
41310 \begin_layout Standard
41311 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41312 \begin_inset space ~
41316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41318 reference "sec:Index"
41325 \begin_layout Subsection
41329 \begin_layout Standard
41330 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41331 \begin_inset space ~
41335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41337 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41344 \begin_layout Subsection
41348 \begin_layout Standard
41349 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41350 Tables are described in section
41351 \begin_inset space ~
41355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41357 reference "sec:Tables"
41361 and in detail in the chapter
41368 \begin_inset space ~
41376 \begin_layout Subsection
41380 \begin_layout Standard
41386 Graphics are described in section
41387 \begin_inset space ~
41391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41393 reference "sec:Graphics"
41400 \begin_layout Subsection
41404 \begin_layout Standard
41405 Inserts a URL as described in section
41406 \begin_inset space ~
41410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41412 reference "subsec:URLs"
41419 \begin_layout Subsection
41423 \begin_layout Standard
41424 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41425 \begin_inset space ~
41429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41431 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41438 \begin_layout Subsection
41442 \begin_layout Standard
41443 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41444 \begin_inset space ~
41448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41450 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41457 \begin_layout Subsection
41461 \begin_layout Standard
41462 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41463 \begin_inset space ~
41467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41469 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41476 \begin_layout Subsection
41479 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41482 \begin_layout Standard
41483 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41484 environments of the same type.
41486 \begin_inset space ~
41490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41492 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41496 for an explanation.
41499 \begin_layout Subsection
41503 \begin_layout Standard
41504 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41505 title or caption of a float.
41506 Inserts a short title as described in section
41507 \begin_inset space ~
41511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41513 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41520 \begin_layout Subsection
41525 \begin_layout Standard
41526 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41527 Code box as described in section
41528 \begin_inset space ~
41532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41534 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41541 \begin_layout Subsection
41543 \begin_inset Index idx
41546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41555 \begin_layout Standard
41556 Inserts a program listings box.
41557 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41559 Program Code Listings
41564 \begin_inset space ~
41572 \begin_layout Subsection
41574 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41578 \begin_layout Standard
41580 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41581 Inserts the actual date.
41582 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41589 \begin_layout Subsection
41593 \begin_layout Standard
41594 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41595 \begin_inset space ~
41599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41601 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41608 \begin_layout Section
41610 \begin_inset Index idx
41613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41622 \begin_layout Standard
41623 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41624 \begin_inset space ~
41627 of the current document.
41628 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41631 \begin_layout Subsection
41635 \begin_layout Standard
41636 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41637 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41638 to jump, for example, between section
41639 \begin_inset space ~
41643 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41644 \begin_inset space ~
41647 2.5 and use the submenu
41650 \begin_inset space ~
41654 \begin_inset space ~
41661 \begin_inset space ~
41667 \begin_inset space ~
41671 \begin_inset space ~
41677 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41681 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41687 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41690 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41693 \begin_layout Standard
41694 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41698 \begin_inset space ~
41703 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41706 \begin_inset space ~
41711 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41714 \begin_layout Subsection
41715 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41718 \begin_layout Standard
41719 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41723 \begin_layout Subsection
41727 \begin_layout Standard
41728 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41729 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41730 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41734 \begin_inset space ~
41738 \begin_inset space ~
41746 \begin_layout Subsection
41750 \begin_layout Standard
41751 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41754 The \SpecialChar LyX
41755 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41757 \begin_inset space ~
41765 \begin_inset space ~
41770 manual for a detailed description.
41773 \begin_layout Section
41775 \begin_inset Index idx
41778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41787 \begin_layout Subsection
41791 \begin_layout Standard
41792 Change Tracking is described in section
41793 \begin_inset space ~
41797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41799 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41806 \begin_layout Subsection
41814 \begin_layout Standard
41815 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41816 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41817 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41819 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41820 to the clipboard or update the view.
41821 \begin_inset Newline newline
41824 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41828 \begin_layout Standard
41831 Open Containing Directory
41833 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41834 's temporary folder for the document.
41835 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41836 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41837 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41838 For example some journals require to send the
41842 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41846 \begin_layout Subsection
41847 Start Appendix Here
41850 \begin_layout Standard
41851 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41852 as described in section
41853 \begin_inset space ~
41857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41859 reference "sec:Appendices"
41866 \begin_layout Subsection
41868 \begin_inset space ~
41874 \begin_layout Standard
41875 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41876 default output format for the document (menu
41878 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41879 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41880 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41882 \begin_inset space ~
41886 \begin_inset space ~
41892 \begin_inset space ~
41896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41898 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41902 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41905 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41906 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41908 \begin_inset space ~
41911 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41913 \begin_inset space ~
41916 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41918 \begin_inset space ~
41922 \begin_inset space ~
41928 \begin_inset space ~
41932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41934 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41938 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
41939 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41941 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41942 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41944 \begin_inset space ~
41947 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41949 \begin_inset space ~
41952 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41956 \begin_inset space ~
41960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41962 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41967 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41968 when it is first configured.
41969 The default output format is
41972 \begin_inset space ~
41980 \begin_layout Subsection
41981 View (Other Formats)
41984 \begin_layout Standard
41985 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
41986 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
41987 actual document with an external program.
41988 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
41989 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41990 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
41992 All possible formats are listed in section
41993 \begin_inset space ~
41997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41999 reference "subsec:Export"
42004 You should at least see the menu entry
42009 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42011 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42013 \begin_inset space ~
42017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42019 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42024 \begin_inset Index idx
42027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42028 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42037 \begin_layout Standard
42038 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42039 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42041 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42042 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42044 \begin_inset space ~
42047 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42049 \begin_inset space ~
42052 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42056 \begin_inset space ~
42060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42062 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42067 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42068 when it is first configured.
42071 \begin_layout Subsection
42073 \begin_inset space ~
42079 \begin_layout Standard
42080 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42081 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42084 \begin_layout Subsection
42085 Update (Other Formats)
42088 \begin_layout Standard
42089 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42090 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42093 \begin_layout Subsection
42094 View Master Document
42097 \begin_layout Standard
42098 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42114 \begin_inset space ~
42119 manual for more information on this topic).
42120 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42121 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42125 \begin_inset space ~
42129 \begin_inset space ~
42134 generates the output of the whole book, while
42138 will just output the chapter alone.
42141 \begin_layout Standard
42142 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42143 in the document settings (menu
42145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42146 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42147 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42149 \begin_inset space ~
42153 \begin_inset space ~
42159 \begin_inset space ~
42163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42165 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42169 ) or in the preferences (menu
42171 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42172 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42174 \begin_inset space ~
42177 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42179 \begin_inset space ~
42182 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42184 \begin_inset space ~
42188 \begin_inset space ~
42194 \begin_inset space ~
42198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42200 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42207 \begin_layout Subsection
42208 Update Master Document
42211 \begin_layout Standard
42212 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42228 \begin_inset space ~
42233 manual for more information on this topic).
42234 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42235 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42238 \begin_layout Standard
42239 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42240 in the document settings (menu
42242 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42243 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42244 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42246 \begin_inset space ~
42250 \begin_inset space ~
42256 \begin_inset space ~
42260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42262 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42266 ) or in the preferences (menu
42268 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42269 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42271 \begin_inset space ~
42274 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42276 \begin_inset space ~
42279 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42281 \begin_inset space ~
42285 \begin_inset space ~
42291 \begin_inset space ~
42295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42297 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42304 \begin_layout Subsection
42306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42308 name "subsec:Compressed"
42315 \begin_layout Standard
42316 Un/compresses the current document.
42317 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42318 compression (see the
42320 Additional Features
42322 manual for details).
42325 \begin_layout Subsection
42329 \begin_layout Standard
42330 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42333 \begin_layout Subsection
42337 \begin_layout Standard
42338 The document settings are described in appendix
42339 \begin_inset space ~
42343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42345 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42352 \begin_layout Section
42354 \begin_inset Index idx
42357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42366 \begin_layout Subsection
42370 \begin_layout Standard
42371 Spell checking is explained in section
42372 \begin_inset space ~
42376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42378 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42385 \begin_layout Subsection
42389 \begin_layout Standard
42390 The thesaurus is described in section
42391 \begin_inset space ~
42395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42397 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42404 \begin_layout Subsection
42406 \begin_inset Index idx
42409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42416 \begin_inset Index idx
42419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42428 \begin_layout Standard
42429 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42430 the highlighted document part.
42433 \begin_layout Subsection
42439 \begin_inset Index idx
42442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42443 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42452 \begin_layout Standard
42453 Generates with the help of the program
42455 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42458 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42459 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42460 This feature is not available on Windows.
42463 \begin_layout Subsection
42469 \begin_inset Index idx
42472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42482 \begin_layout Standard
42483 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42488 \begin_inset space ~
42493 to see the full filename paths.
42496 \begin_layout Subsection
42498 \begin_inset Index idx
42501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42510 \begin_layout Standard
42511 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42512 files as described in section
42513 \begin_inset space ~
42517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42519 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42526 \begin_layout Subsection
42528 \begin_inset Index idx
42531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42544 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42562 \begin_inset Index idx
42565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42566 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42575 \begin_layout Standard
42576 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42577 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42578 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42579 -packages and programs it needs; see
42581 \begin_inset space ~
42585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42587 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42594 \begin_layout Subsection
42598 \begin_layout Standard
42603 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42604 \begin_inset space ~
42608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42610 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42617 \begin_layout Section
42619 \begin_inset Index idx
42622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42631 \begin_layout Standard
42632 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42633 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42635 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42639 \begin_layout Standard
42643 \begin_inset space ~
42648 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42649 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42650 packages and classes found
42651 by \SpecialChar LyX
42653 \begin_inset space ~
42657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42659 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42666 \begin_layout Standard
42670 \begin_inset space ~
42675 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42680 \begin_layout Section
42682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42684 name "sec:Toolbars"
42691 \begin_layout Standard
42692 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42693 \begin_inset space ~
42697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42699 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42706 \begin_layout Standard
42707 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42708 This is described in the
42710 Additional Features
42715 \begin_layout Subsection
42717 \begin_inset Index idx
42720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42729 \begin_layout Standard
42730 \begin_inset Graphics
42731 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42739 \begin_layout Standard
42740 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42746 \begin_layout Standard
42747 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42764 \begin_inset Note Note
42767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42768 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42773 manual for more information.
42781 \begin_layout Standard
42782 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42788 \begin_layout Standard
42789 \begin_inset Tabular
42790 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42791 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42792 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42793 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42799 \begin_inset Graphics
42800 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42814 pull-down box for the environments
42827 \begin_layout Standard
42828 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42834 \begin_layout Standard
42836 \begin_inset Tabular
42837 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
42838 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42839 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42840 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42864 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42871 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42894 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42924 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42931 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42940 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
42948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42954 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42961 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42970 arg "spelling-continuously"
42978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42982 Spellcheck continuously
42988 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43011 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43018 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43041 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43048 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43071 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43078 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43101 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43108 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43131 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43133 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43138 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43147 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43156 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43170 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43189 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43196 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43210 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43229 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43238 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43252 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43253 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43260 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43281 Emphasize text, function of the
43282 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43285 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43287 \begin_inset space ~
43290 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43292 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43298 arg "dialog-show character"
43309 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43330 Set text to noun style, function of the
43331 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43334 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43336 \begin_inset space ~
43339 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43341 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43347 arg "dialog-show character"
43358 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43364 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43367 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43380 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43383 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43396 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43401 arg "textstyle-apply"
43411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43416 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43417 Format text using the current settings in the
43419 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43421 \begin_inset space ~
43424 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43459 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43461 \begin_inset space ~
43470 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43479 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43493 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43507 arg "tabular-insert"
43515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43521 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43534 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43537 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43550 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43553 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43560 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43569 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43581 Toggle outline window on/off,
43583 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43599 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43611 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43617 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43626 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43638 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43651 \begin_layout Subsection
43653 \begin_inset Index idx
43656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43665 \begin_layout Standard
43666 \begin_inset Graphics
43667 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43675 \begin_layout Standard
43676 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43682 \begin_layout Standard
43683 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43687 \begin_layout Standard
43688 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43694 \begin_layout Standard
43695 \begin_inset Tabular
43696 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43697 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43698 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43699 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43700 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43727 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43736 arg "layout Enumerate"
43744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43754 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43763 arg "layout Itemize"
43771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43781 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43808 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43817 arg "layout Description"
43825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43844 arg "depth-increment"
43852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43858 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43860 \begin_inset space ~
43864 \begin_inset space ~
43873 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43882 arg "depth-decrement"
43890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43896 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43898 \begin_inset space ~
43902 \begin_inset space ~
43911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43920 arg "float-insert figure"
43928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43934 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43935 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43942 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43951 arg "float-insert table"
43959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43965 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43966 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43973 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43996 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44003 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44012 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44026 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44033 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44042 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44056 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44086 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44088 \begin_inset space ~
44097 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44106 arg "nomencl-insert"
44114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44122 \begin_inset space ~
44131 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44140 arg "footnote-insert"
44148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44154 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44161 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44170 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44184 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44186 \begin_inset space ~
44195 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44218 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44219 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44221 \begin_inset space ~
44230 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44239 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44253 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44260 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44290 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44313 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44315 \begin_inset space ~
44324 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44333 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44348 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44364 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44378 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44379 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44381 \begin_inset space ~
44390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44399 arg "dialog-show character"
44407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44413 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44415 \begin_inset space ~
44418 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44425 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44431 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44436 arg "textstyle-apply"
44444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44449 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44450 Format text using the recent settings in the
44453 arg "dialog-show character"
44462 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44471 arg "layout-paragraph"
44479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44487 \begin_inset space ~
44496 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44505 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44519 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44533 \begin_layout Subsection
44534 View/Update Toolbar
44535 \begin_inset Index idx
44538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44539 Toolbar ! View / Update
44547 \begin_layout Standard
44548 \begin_inset Graphics
44549 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44556 \begin_layout Standard
44557 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44563 \begin_layout Standard
44564 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44568 \begin_layout Standard
44569 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44575 \begin_layout Standard
44576 \begin_inset Tabular
44577 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44578 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44579 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44580 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44581 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44604 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44611 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44620 arg "buffer-update"
44628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44634 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44641 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44650 arg "master-buffer-view"
44658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44664 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44666 \begin_inset space ~
44675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44684 arg "master-buffer-update"
44692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44698 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44700 \begin_inset space ~
44704 \begin_inset space ~
44713 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44722 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44736 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44737 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44738 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44739 Synchronize with Output
44745 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44756 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
44766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44772 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44773 View (Other Formats)
44779 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44786 arg "update-others"
44790 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
44798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44805 Update (Other Formats)
44818 \begin_layout Standard
44820 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
44821 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44827 \begin_layout Subsection
44831 \begin_layout Standard
44832 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44833 \begin_inset space ~
44837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44839 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44843 , the table toolbar
44844 \begin_inset Index idx
44847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44856 \begin_inset space ~
44861 manual and the math macro toolbar
44862 \begin_inset Index idx
44865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44878 \begin_layout Chapter
44879 The Document Settings
44880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44882 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44887 \begin_inset Index idx
44890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44891 Document ! Settings
44899 \begin_layout Standard
44903 \begin_inset space ~
44908 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44909 is called with the menu
44911 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44915 You can save your document settings as default with the
44917 Save as Document Defaults
44919 button in any dialog.
44920 This will create a template named
44924 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44925 when you create a new document without
44929 \begin_layout Standard
44934 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
44935 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
44938 \begin_layout Standard
44939 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
44940 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
44941 to find the one you are looking for.
44942 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
44943 the submenus of the dialog.
44945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44949 \begin_inset space \space{}
44953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44960 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
44961 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
44962 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
44965 \begin_layout Section
44969 \begin_layout Standard
44970 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
44972 Document classes are described in section
44973 \begin_inset space ~
44977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44979 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
44987 \begin_layout Standard
44991 \begin_inset space ~
44996 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45001 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45002 as a layout for a document class.
45003 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45005 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45014 \begin_layout Standard
45015 Some classes use special class options by default.
45016 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45020 and you can decide to use them or not.
45021 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45022 recommended you leave them untouched.
45027 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45028 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45033 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45035 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45041 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45042 \begin_inset Newline newline
45047 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45050 \begin_inset Newline newline
45053 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45054 distribution, see section
45059 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45061 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45074 \begin_layout Standard
45079 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45080 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45081 in the background if the child document
45082 is opened without its master.
45083 This way child documents are always compilable.
45084 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45091 \begin_inset space ~
45099 \begin_layout Standard
45100 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45111 \begin_inset Index idx
45114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45116 packages ! prettyref
45122 \begin_inset Index idx
45125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45127 packages ! refstyle
45132 for cross-references, see section
45133 \begin_inset space ~
45137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45139 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45146 \begin_layout Section
45150 \begin_layout Standard
45151 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45152 Please refer to the section
45155 \begin_inset space ~
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45168 manual for details.
45171 \begin_layout Section
45175 \begin_layout Standard
45176 Modules are explained in section
45177 \begin_inset space ~
45181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45183 reference "subsec:Modules"
45190 \begin_layout Section
45194 \begin_layout Standard
45196 \begin_inset space ~
45200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45202 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45209 \begin_layout Section
45213 \begin_layout Standard
45214 The document font settings are described in section
45215 \begin_inset space ~
45219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45221 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45228 \begin_layout Section
45232 \begin_layout Standard
45233 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45245 \begin_inset space ~
45250 and whether it should be a
45253 \begin_inset space ~
45258 can also be specified here.
45261 \begin_layout Standard
45262 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45263 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45264 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45266 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45269 \begin_layout Standard
45272 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45275 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45276 justifies the text on screen.
45277 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45279 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45283 \begin_layout Standard
45285 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45294 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45299 \begin_layout Section
45303 \begin_layout Standard
45304 This dialog is described in sections
45305 \begin_inset space ~
45309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45311 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45318 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45325 \begin_layout Section
45329 \begin_layout Standard
45330 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45331 \begin_inset space ~
45335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45337 reference "subsec:Margins"
45344 \begin_layout Section
45346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45348 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45353 \begin_inset Index idx
45356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45357 Language ! Encoding
45365 \begin_layout Standard
45366 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45367 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45368 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45370 is always encoded in utf8).
45371 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45372 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45373 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45374 -command is not known for
45375 a particular character).
45376 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45380 \begin_layout Standard
45382 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45383 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45384 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45385 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45386 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45387 's default encoding).
45388 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45389 's Unicode support covers the
45390 characters of most scripts.
45391 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45392 using one of the traditional, or
45393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45400 , encodings is necessary.
45403 \begin_layout Standard
45405 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45407 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45410 Traditional (auto-selected)
45416 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45417 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45418 the given language(s).
45420 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45424 \begin_layout Standard
45426 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45427 If you use the option
45432 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45435 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45436 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45439 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45442 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45443 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45444 exactly one encoding.
45445 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45450 \begin_layout Standard
45452 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45453 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45459 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45460 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45464 \begin_layout Standard
45466 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45467 Finally, you can also select
45471 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45472 Note that this encoding is then used for
45477 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45478 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45482 \begin_layout Standard
45484 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45487 Do not load inputenc
45489 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45490 from automatically loading the
45497 \begin_inset Index idx
45500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45502 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
45504 packages ! inputenc
45510 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
45511 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
45512 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45513 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45514 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45516 Note that this option is only available for the standard
45522 Traditional (auto-selected)
45529 \begin_layout Standard
45531 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
45533 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45534 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45535 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45536 installation supports Unicode), choose
45537 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45538 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45539 is quite incomplete, so
45540 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45545 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45546 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45547 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45548 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45549 -commands is not used, because all
45550 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45551 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45552 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45553 , two new alternative engines
45554 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45556 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45558 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45561 \begin_inset space ~
45569 \begin_inset space ~
45577 \begin_inset space ~
45583 \begin_inset space ~
45587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45589 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45594 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45598 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45603 \begin_layout Standard
45607 \begin_inset space ~
45612 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45613 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45623 The possible settings are:
45626 \begin_layout Description
45627 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45629 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45630 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45634 \begin_inset space ~
45638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45640 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45647 \begin_layout Description
45648 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45649 format you will use.
45650 In many cases this will be
45655 \begin_inset Index idx
45658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45666 If the newer package
45671 \begin_inset Index idx
45674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45676 packages ! polyglossia
45681 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45682 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45683 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45685 this package will be used instead of
45692 \begin_layout Description
45694 \begin_inset space ~
45705 would be more appropriate.
45708 \begin_layout Description
45709 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45710 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45714 (for German texts), type in
45717 \begin_inset Newline newline
45722 usepackage{ngerman}
45725 \begin_layout Description
45726 None will not use a language package.
45727 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45730 \begin_layout Standard
45731 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45734 \begin_layout Description
45736 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
45738 \begin_inset space ~
45742 \begin_inset space ~
45746 \begin_inset space ~
45753 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45759 \begin_inset Index idx
45762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45764 packages ! inputenc
45770 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45771 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45772 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45778 \begin_layout Description
45779 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45781 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45782 commands, which may result in a big
45783 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45784 -commands are needed.
45786 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
45787 This is the same as the
45800 \begin_layout Description
45802 \begin_inset space ~
45806 \begin_inset space ~
45809 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45812 \begin_layout Description
45814 \begin_inset space ~
45818 \begin_inset space ~
45821 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45824 \begin_layout Description
45826 \begin_inset space ~
45829 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45832 \begin_layout Description
45834 \begin_inset space ~
45838 \begin_inset space ~
45841 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45842 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45845 \begin_layout Description
45847 \begin_inset space ~
45851 \begin_inset space ~
45854 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45858 \begin_layout Description
45860 \begin_inset space ~
45864 \begin_inset space ~
45867 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45868 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45871 \begin_layout Description
45873 \begin_inset space ~
45877 \begin_inset space ~
45881 \begin_inset space ~
45884 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45885 \begin_inset space ~
45891 \begin_layout Description
45893 \begin_inset space ~
45897 \begin_inset space ~
45901 \begin_inset space ~
45904 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45905 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45908 \begin_layout Description
45910 \begin_inset space ~
45914 \begin_inset space ~
45917 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45918 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45919 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45920 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45921 \begin_inset space ~
45925 \begin_inset space ~
45931 \begin_layout Description
45933 \begin_inset space ~
45937 \begin_inset space ~
45940 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
45941 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
45942 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45944 should try to use the encoding Unicode
45945 \begin_inset space ~
45949 \begin_inset space ~
45955 \begin_layout Description
45957 \begin_inset space ~
45961 \begin_inset space ~
45964 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
45967 \begin_layout Description
45969 \begin_inset space ~
45973 \begin_inset space ~
45976 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
45979 \begin_layout Description
45981 \begin_inset space ~
45985 \begin_inset space ~
45988 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
45991 \begin_layout Description
45993 \begin_inset space ~
45996 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
45999 \begin_layout Description
46001 \begin_inset space ~
46004 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46007 \begin_layout Description
46009 \begin_inset space ~
46013 \begin_inset space ~
46016 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46019 \begin_layout Description
46021 \begin_inset space ~
46025 \begin_inset space ~
46031 \begin_layout Description
46033 \begin_inset space ~
46037 \begin_inset space ~
46040 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46043 \begin_layout Description
46045 \begin_inset space ~
46049 \begin_inset space ~
46055 \begin_layout Description
46057 \begin_inset space ~
46061 \begin_inset space ~
46064 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46070 \begin_inset Index idx
46073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46080 , when using this, set the document language to
46085 \begin_layout Description
46087 \begin_inset space ~
46091 \begin_inset space ~
46094 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46099 , when using this, set the document language to
46102 \begin_inset space ~
46108 \begin_layout Description
46110 \begin_inset space ~
46114 \begin_inset space ~
46117 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46123 \begin_inset Index idx
46126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46128 packages ! japanese
46133 , when using this, set the document language to
46138 \begin_layout Description
46140 \begin_inset space ~
46144 \begin_inset space ~
46147 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46152 , when using this, set the document language to
46157 \begin_layout Description
46159 \begin_inset space ~
46163 \begin_inset space ~
46166 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46171 , when using this, set the document language to
46176 \begin_layout Description
46178 \begin_inset space ~
46181 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46184 \begin_layout Description
46186 \begin_inset space ~
46190 \begin_inset space ~
46194 \begin_inset space ~
46197 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46200 \begin_layout Description
46202 \begin_inset space ~
46206 \begin_inset space ~
46210 \begin_inset space ~
46213 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46214 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46215 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46218 \begin_layout Description
46220 \begin_inset space ~
46224 \begin_inset space ~
46230 \begin_layout Description
46232 \begin_inset space ~
46236 \begin_inset space ~
46239 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46240 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46243 \begin_layout Description
46245 \begin_inset space ~
46249 \begin_inset space ~
46252 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46258 \begin_inset Index idx
46261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46268 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46269 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46271 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46272 with the default encoding (
46274 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46280 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46281 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46286 \begin_layout Description
46288 \begin_inset space ~
46296 \begin_inset space ~
46299 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46306 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46309 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46316 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46317 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46319 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46322 \begin_layout Description
46324 \begin_inset space ~
46328 \begin_inset space ~
46331 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46337 \begin_inset Index idx
46340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46348 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46351 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46353 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46354 This used to be more comprehensive than
46357 \begin_inset space ~
46362 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46367 \begin_layout Description
46369 \begin_inset space ~
46372 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46378 \begin_inset Index idx
46381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46383 packages ! inputenc
46390 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46391 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46393 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46394 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46395 with the default encoding (
46397 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46403 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46404 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46409 \begin_layout Description
46411 \begin_inset space ~
46415 \begin_inset space ~
46419 \begin_inset space ~
46422 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46423 \begin_inset space ~
46429 \begin_layout Description
46431 \begin_inset space ~
46435 \begin_inset space ~
46439 \begin_inset space ~
46442 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46443 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46444 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46448 \begin_layout Description
46450 \begin_inset space ~
46454 \begin_inset space ~
46458 \begin_inset space ~
46461 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46462 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46465 \begin_layout Section
46467 \begin_inset Index idx
46470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46477 \begin_inset Index idx
46480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46487 \begin_inset Index idx
46490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46491 Color ! Shaded boxes
46497 \begin_inset Index idx
46500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46501 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46509 \begin_layout Standard
46510 Here you can alter the font color for the
46514 (default: black), for
46517 \begin_inset space ~
46522 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46526 (default: white) and for
46529 \begin_inset space ~
46539 sets the color back to the default.
46542 \begin_layout Standard
46543 Clicking any button showing
46551 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46552 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46553 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46554 later more quickly.
46557 \begin_layout Standard
46558 Note, if you change the
46561 \begin_inset space ~
46566 font color and use the option
46569 \begin_inset space ~
46574 in the document settings under
46577 \begin_inset space ~
46582 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46583 \begin_inset space ~
46587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46589 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46596 \begin_layout Standard
46597 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46603 \begin_layout Standard
46607 \begin_inset space ~
46616 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46619 \begin_inset space ~
46622 Code after a forced page break:
46625 \begin_layout Itemize
46626 For the page color:
46627 \begin_inset Newline newline
46634 pagecolor{color name}
46637 \begin_layout Itemize
46638 For the text color:
46639 \begin_inset Newline newline
46649 \begin_layout Standard
46650 You are restricted to one of
46686 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46693 \begin_inset space ~
46699 \begin_inset Newline newline
46702 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46703 names to refer to them:
46706 \begin_layout Itemize
46712 \begin_inset Newline newline
46717 page_backgroundcolor
46720 \begin_layout Itemize
46724 \begin_inset space ~
46730 \begin_inset Newline newline
46738 \begin_layout Itemize
46742 \begin_inset space ~
46748 \begin_inset Newline newline
46756 \begin_layout Itemize
46760 \begin_inset space ~
46766 \begin_inset Newline newline
46774 \begin_layout Standard
46775 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46778 \begin_inset space ~
46786 \begin_inset space ~
46794 \begin_layout Section
46798 \begin_layout Standard
46799 Here you can adjust the
46803 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46807 as described in section
46808 \begin_inset space ~
46812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46814 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46819 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
46823 \begin_layout Standard
46825 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
46826 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
46828 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
46829 of this package can be used as well.
46830 The most common one are:
46833 \begin_layout Description
46835 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
46836 right Line numbers to the right margin
46839 \begin_layout Description
46841 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
46842 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
46846 \begin_layout Description
46848 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
46849 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
46852 \begin_layout Description
46854 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
46855 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
46858 \begin_layout Description
46860 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
46862 \begin_inset space ~
46865 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
46870 \begin_layout Section
46874 \begin_layout Standard
46875 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46881 \begin_inset Index idx
46884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46886 packages ! biblatex
46896 \begin_inset Index idx
46899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46911 \begin_inset Index idx
46914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46922 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46925 Sectioned bibliography
46927 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46933 \begin_inset Index idx
46936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46938 packages ! bibtopic
46948 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
46949 Finally, you can select a document-specific
46953 for the generation of the bibliography.
46954 For a further description of these possibilities see section
46955 \begin_inset space ~
46959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46961 reference "sec:Bibliography"
46968 \begin_layout Section
46972 \begin_layout Standard
46973 Here you can define the
46977 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
46979 \begin_inset space ~
46983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46985 reference "sec:Index"
46992 \begin_layout Section
46996 \begin_layout Standard
46997 The PDF properties are explained in section
46998 \begin_inset space ~
47002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47004 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47011 \begin_layout Section
47015 \begin_layout Standard
47016 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47017 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47023 \begin_inset Index idx
47026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47038 \begin_inset Index idx
47041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47053 \begin_inset Index idx
47056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47068 \begin_inset Index idx
47071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47083 \begin_inset Index idx
47086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47088 packages ! mathdots
47098 \begin_inset Index idx
47101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47103 packages ! mathtools
47113 \begin_inset Index idx
47116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47128 \begin_inset Index idx
47131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47133 packages ! stackrel
47143 \begin_inset Index idx
47146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47148 packages ! stmaryrd
47158 \begin_inset Index idx
47161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47163 packages ! undertilde
47168 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47171 \begin_layout Description
47172 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47173 -errors in formulas,
47174 ensure that you have this enabled.
47177 \begin_layout Description
47178 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47179 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47180 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47184 \begin_layout Description
47185 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47188 \begin_inset space ~
47200 \begin_layout Description
47201 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47204 \begin_inset space ~
47216 \begin_layout Description
47217 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47228 \begin_layout Description
47229 mathtools is used for the math commands
47265 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47272 \begin_layout Description
47273 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47275 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47284 \begin_layout Description
47285 stackrel is used for the math command
47302 \begin_layout Description
47303 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47306 \begin_layout Description
47307 undertilde is used for the math command
47315 Accents for one Character
47324 \begin_layout Section
47326 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47328 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47334 \begin_layout Standard
47336 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47337 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47340 \begin_layout Standard
47342 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47343 The float placement options
47344 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47347 are described in the section
47350 \begin_inset space ~
47354 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47356 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47364 \begin_inset space ~
47372 \begin_layout Section
47376 \begin_layout Standard
47377 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47379 Program Code Listings
47384 \begin_inset space ~
47392 \begin_layout Section
47396 \begin_layout Standard
47397 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47405 set to be used and set the
47410 The itemize environment is described in section
47411 \begin_inset space ~
47415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47417 reference "sec:Itemize"
47424 \begin_layout Standard
47425 You can furthermore specify a
47428 \begin_inset space ~
47433 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47434 command of the desired character.
47435 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47442 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47448 \begin_inset space \space{}
47452 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47462 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47463 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47466 \begin_layout Standard
47467 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47475 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47476 -packages in the preamble (menu
47479 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47480 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47483 \begin_inset space ~
47489 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47493 usepackage{textcomp}
47496 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47500 usepackage{amssymb}
47510 \begin_layout Section
47514 \begin_layout Standard
47515 Branches are described in section
47516 \begin_inset space ~
47520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47522 reference "sec:Branches"
47529 \begin_layout Section
47531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47533 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47540 \begin_layout Standard
47541 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47544 \begin_layout Description
47546 \begin_inset space ~
47550 \begin_inset space ~
47553 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47573 View Master Document
47574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47581 Update Master Document
47582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47589 menu or the toolbar.
47590 The default is set in
47592 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47593 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47595 \begin_inset space ~
47598 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47602 \begin_inset space ~
47606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47608 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47615 \begin_layout Description
47617 \begin_inset space ~
47621 \begin_inset space ~
47624 Output settings for the menu
47626 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47628 \begin_inset space ~
47634 For a detailed description see section
47636 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47641 \begin_inset space ~
47649 \begin_layout Description
47651 \begin_inset space ~
47655 \begin_inset space ~
47658 Options offers settings for the export format
47666 \begin_inset space ~
47671 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47672 \begin_inset space ~
47675 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47679 \begin_inset space ~
47684 settings are described in detail in section
47686 Math Output in XHTML
47691 \begin_inset space ~
47700 \begin_inset space ~
47704 \begin_inset space ~
47709 is used for the size of equations in the output.
47712 \begin_layout Description
47714 \begin_inset space ~
47719 Save transient properties
47721 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
47722 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
47723 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
47727 \begin_layout Itemize
47728 the activation of change tracking
47731 \begin_layout Itemize
47732 the output of tracked changes
47735 \begin_layout Itemize
47736 the recording of the document directory path.
47739 \begin_layout Standard
47740 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
47741 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
47745 \begin_layout Section
47753 \begin_layout Standard
47754 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47756 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
47758 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47760 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
47764 \begin_layout Standard
47765 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47766 -syntax is given in section
47767 \begin_inset space ~
47771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47773 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
47780 \begin_layout Chapter
47786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47788 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47793 \begin_inset Index idx
47796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47805 \begin_layout Standard
47806 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
47808 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47812 It has the following submenus.
47815 \begin_layout Section
47819 \begin_layout Subsection
47823 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47824 User Interface File
47825 \begin_inset Index idx
47828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47829 Customization ! of toolbars
47835 \begin_inset Index idx
47838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47839 Customization ! of menus
47847 \begin_layout Standard
47848 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
47849 interface (ui) file.
47850 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
47858 \begin_layout Description
47863 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
47866 \begin_layout Description
47873 the menu entries in popup context menus
47876 \begin_layout Description
47881 specifies the toolbar buttons
47884 \begin_layout Standard
47885 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
47886 and edit the entries.
47889 \begin_layout Standard
47890 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
47902 entries must be finished with an explicit
47927 and in the case of the
47928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47940 The syntax for the entries is:
47943 \begin_layout Standard
47944 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47973 \begin_layout Standard
47975 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47978 All the \SpecialChar LyX
47979 -functions are listed in the menu
47981 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
47983 \begin_inset space ~
47991 \begin_layout Standard
47992 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
47998 \begin_layout Standard
47999 For example, assuming you use the menu
48001 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48004 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48008 \begin_layout Standard
48009 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48033 \begin_layout Standard
48035 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48050 to have the sixth bookmark.
48053 \begin_layout Standard
48057 \begin_inset space ~
48062 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48063 's toolbar buttons.
48064 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48065 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48068 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48076 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48080 \begin_layout Standard
48083 Enable tool tips in main work area
48085 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48093 \begin_layout Standard
48098 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48099 should display in the menu
48101 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48103 \begin_inset space ~
48111 \begin_layout Subsection
48115 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48119 \begin_layout Standard
48122 Restore window layouts and geometries
48125 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48126 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48130 \begin_layout Standard
48133 Restore cursor positions
48135 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48139 \begin_layout Standard
48142 Load opened files from last session
48144 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48148 \begin_layout Standard
48151 Clear all session information
48153 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48154 sessions (cursor positions, names
48155 of last opened documents, etc.).
48158 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48162 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48167 \begin_inset Index idx
48170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48179 \begin_layout Standard
48182 Backup original documents when saving
48184 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48185 it was saved the last time.
48186 It is stored in the
48189 \begin_inset space ~
48195 \begin_inset space ~
48199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48201 reference "sec:Paths"
48205 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48208 \begin_inset space ~
48214 The backup file has the file extension
48215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48229 \begin_layout Standard
48232 Backup documents, every
48234 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48237 \begin_layout Standard
48240 Save documents compressed by default
48242 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48243 \begin_inset space ~
48247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48249 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48254 This applies to newly created documents only.
48255 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48259 Windows & work area
48262 \begin_layout Standard
48265 Open documents in tabs
48267 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48271 \begin_layout Standard
48276 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48283 \begin_inset space ~
48287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48289 reference "sec:Paths"
48293 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48300 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48301 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48302 of \SpecialChar LyX
48304 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48305 instance is created for each file.
48308 \begin_layout Standard
48311 Single close-tab button
48313 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48323 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48324 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48325 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48329 \begin_layout Standard
48330 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48338 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48339 before the change takes effect.
48347 \begin_layout Standard
48352 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48354 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48356 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48360 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48361 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48362 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48365 \begin_layout Subsection
48367 \begin_inset Index idx
48370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48379 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48386 \begin_layout Standard
48387 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48391 \begin_layout Standard
48392 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48400 This section only deals with the fonts
48404 the \SpecialChar LyX
48406 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48409 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48410 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48421 \begin_layout Standard
48422 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48439 (depends on the system) as its
48442 \begin_inset space ~
48458 \begin_layout Standard
48459 You can change the font size with the
48466 \begin_layout Standard
48471 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48476 points have the size of 1
48477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48481 \begin_inset space ~
48485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48487 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48492 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48497 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48498 \begin_inset space ~
48502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48504 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48511 \begin_layout Subsection
48513 \begin_inset Index idx
48516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48517 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
48524 \begin_inset Index idx
48527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48536 \begin_layout Standard
48537 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48538 by choosing an item in the
48539 list and selecting the
48546 \begin_layout Standard
48547 By checking the option
48551 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48554 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48555 \begin_inset space ~
48559 \begin_inset space ~
48564 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48567 \begin_layout Subsection
48569 \begin_inset Index idx
48572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48581 \begin_layout Standard
48582 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48586 \begin_layout Standard
48591 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48592 This feature is described in section
48593 \begin_inset space ~
48597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48599 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48606 \begin_layout Standard
48607 Checking the option
48610 \begin_inset space ~
48614 \begin_inset space ~
48618 \begin_inset space ~
48623 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48626 \begin_layout Section
48628 \begin_inset Index idx
48631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48640 \begin_layout Subsection
48644 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48648 \begin_layout Standard
48651 Cursor follows scrollbar
48653 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48657 \begin_layout Standard
48658 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48659 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48660 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48663 \begin_layout Standard
48666 Scroll below end of document
48668 is self-explanatory.
48671 \begin_layout Standard
48672 In \SpecialChar LyX
48673 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48680 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48682 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48683 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48686 \begin_layout Standard
48689 Sort environments alphabetically
48691 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48694 \begin_layout Standard
48697 Group environments by their category
48699 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48702 \begin_layout Standard
48707 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
48718 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48722 \begin_layout Standard
48723 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
48728 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
48729 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
48733 \begin_layout Subsection
48735 \begin_inset Index idx
48738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48745 \begin_inset Index idx
48748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48749 Settings ! Shortcuts
48757 \begin_layout Standard
48762 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
48764 Several binding files are available, among them:
48767 \begin_layout Description
48768 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
48771 \begin_layout Description
48772 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
48784 \begin_layout Description
48785 mac.bind a set of bindings for
48788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48796 \begin_layout Standard
48797 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
48802 , and binding files for special languages.
48803 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
48804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48808 \begin_inset space \space{}
48812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48820 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
48821 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
48822 will try to use the appropriate binding
48826 \begin_layout Standard
48827 Some binding files, like
48831 , only have a limited scope.
48832 When looking at the end of the file
48836 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
48839 \begin_layout Standard
48843 \begin_inset space ~
48847 \begin_inset space ~
48852 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
48853 in the selected key binding file.
48856 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48860 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
48865 \begin_inset Index idx
48868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48869 Key Bindings ! Editing
48877 \begin_layout Standard
48878 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
48879 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
48880 functions and the bound shortcuts.
48881 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
48884 Show key-bindings containing
48887 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
48888 Insert there for example as keyword
48889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48896 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
48897 functions that contain
48898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48906 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
48907 All \SpecialChar LyX
48908 functions are also listed in the file
48913 that you will find in the
48920 \begin_layout Standard
48921 For example, to add the shortcut
48929 , select the function and press the
48934 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
48935 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
48938 \begin_layout Standard
48939 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
48940 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
48942 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
48943 function names as a semicolon separated list.
48945 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
48950 \begin_layout Standard
48951 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
48954 \begin_layout Standard
48955 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
48957 The syntax of the entries is:
48960 \begin_layout Standard
48966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48985 \begin_layout Standard
48986 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
48987 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
48988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49015 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49016 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49017 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49018 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49020 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49024 , you needed to specify it as
49029 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49032 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49035 \begin_layout Subsection
49037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49039 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49044 \begin_inset Index idx
49047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49054 \begin_inset Index idx
49057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49058 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49066 \begin_layout Standard
49067 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49068 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49069 provides keyboard maps.
49070 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49071 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49074 \begin_inset space ~
49078 \begin_inset space ~
49083 and select the keyboard map file named
49090 \begin_layout Standard
49099 keyboard map and, if you use the
49103 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49106 arg "keymap-primary"
49112 arg "keymap-secondary"
49115 respectively or toggle between them with
49118 arg "keymap-toggle"
49124 \begin_layout Standard
49125 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49133 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49142 \begin_layout Standard
49143 You can also specify the mouse
49145 Wheel scrolling speed
49148 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49152 Middle mouse button pasting
49154 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49155 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49158 \begin_layout Standard
49166 \begin_inset space ~
49170 \begin_inset space ~
49175 you can select a key for zooming.
49176 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49179 \begin_layout Subsection
49183 \begin_layout Standard
49184 Input completion is described in section
49185 \begin_inset space ~
49189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49191 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49198 \begin_layout Section
49200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49207 \begin_inset Index idx
49210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49217 \begin_inset Index idx
49220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49229 \begin_layout Standard
49230 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49231 are normally determined during
49233 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49236 \begin_layout Description
49238 \begin_inset space ~
49241 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49242 's working directory.
49243 It is the default when you
49254 \begin_inset space ~
49262 \begin_layout Description
49264 \begin_inset space ~
49267 templates This directory
49268 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49269 contains the templates that are shown
49270 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49271 will be opened when you use the menu
49272 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49277 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49279 \begin_inset space ~
49283 \begin_inset space ~
49291 \begin_layout Description
49293 \begin_inset space ~
49296 files This directory
49297 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49298 will be opened when you use the
49299 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49300 contains the example files that are listed in
49303 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49312 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49314 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
49316 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
49322 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
49324 \begin_inset Newline newline
49328 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49340 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49341 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49351 \begin_layout Description
49353 \begin_inset space ~
49357 \begin_inset Index idx
49360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49366 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
49367 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
49368 \begin_inset space ~
49372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49374 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49382 will be used to save the backups.
49383 \begin_inset Newline newline
49386 Backup files have the ending
49387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49397 \begin_layout Description
49399 \begin_inset space ~
49402 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49403 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49405 \begin_inset Newline newline
49412 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49418 You can edit this file with the program
49427 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49428 in its preferences under
49431 \begin_inset space ~
49437 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49442 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49444 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49445 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49451 and \SpecialChar LyX
49452 need to be running the same time.
49453 \begin_inset Newline newline
49456 The pipe is also used for the
49460 feature, see section
49461 \begin_inset space ~
49465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49467 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49472 \begin_inset Newline newline
49475 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49476 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49477 \begin_inset Newline newline
49493 \begin_layout Description
49495 \begin_inset space ~
49498 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49501 \begin_layout Description
49503 \begin_inset space ~
49506 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49507 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49508 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49511 \begin_layout Description
49513 \begin_inset space ~
49516 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49522 You only need to specify it if you are using
49526 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49528 For \SpecialChar LyX
49533 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49537 \begin_layout Description
49539 \begin_inset space ~
49542 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49543 When \SpecialChar LyX
49544 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49545 to find it on the system.
49546 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49548 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49557 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49558 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49561 \begin_layout Description
49563 \begin_inset space ~
49566 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49567 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49568 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49569 code or in the document
49571 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
49573 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
49574 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
49575 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
49576 scanned for the input files.
49577 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
49578 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
49580 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
49581 compilation may fail for some documents.
49584 \begin_layout Section
49588 \begin_layout Standard
49589 Here you can insert your
49598 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
49600 \begin_inset space ~
49604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49606 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49610 , to mark changes you make as yours.
49613 \begin_layout Section
49615 \begin_inset Index idx
49618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49619 Language ! Settings
49625 \begin_inset Index idx
49628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49629 Settings ! Language
49637 \begin_layout Subsection
49639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49641 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
49648 \begin_layout Description
49650 \begin_inset space ~
49654 \begin_inset space ~
49657 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
49659 You can find its actual translation status here:
49660 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49662 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
49670 \begin_layout Description
49672 \begin_inset space ~
49675 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
49676 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
49677 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
49678 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
49679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49695 The most widespread language package is
49700 \begin_inset Index idx
49703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49710 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
49712 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
49713 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49714 come with the alternative
49720 \begin_inset Index idx
49723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49725 packages ! polyglossia
49730 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
49731 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
49737 The available selections are described in section
49738 \begin_inset space ~
49742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49744 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
49751 \begin_layout Description
49753 \begin_inset space ~
49756 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49757 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
49758 you can here specify the command to start the package.
49759 An example is the start command
49765 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
49767 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
49771 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49787 selectlanguage{$$lang}
49792 \begin_layout Description
49794 \begin_inset space ~
49802 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
49803 command toggles the package on and off.
49806 \begin_layout Description
49808 \begin_inset space ~
49812 \begin_inset space ~
49815 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
49819 \begin_layout Description
49821 \begin_inset space ~
49825 \begin_inset space ~
49828 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
49832 \begin_layout Description
49834 \begin_inset space ~
49838 \begin_inset space ~
49841 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
49842 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
49843 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
49845 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
49852 \begin_layout Description
49854 \begin_inset space ~
49857 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
49859 When this option is not set, the
49862 \begin_inset space ~
49867 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49869 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
49872 \begin_inset space ~
49880 \begin_layout Description
49882 \begin_inset space ~
49888 \begin_inset space ~
49894 When it is not set, the
49897 \begin_inset space ~
49902 is set to the end of the document.
49905 \begin_layout Description
49907 \begin_inset space ~
49911 \begin_inset space ~
49914 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
49915 language will be underlined in blue.
49918 \begin_layout Description
49920 \begin_inset space ~
49924 \begin_inset space ~
49927 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
49928 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
49931 \begin_layout Description
49933 \begin_inset space ~
49936 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
49937 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
49938 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
49939 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
49942 \begin_layout Subsection
49946 \begin_layout Standard
49947 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
49948 \begin_inset space ~
49952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49954 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
49961 \begin_layout Section
49965 \begin_layout Subsection
49967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49969 name "subsec:General-output"
49976 \begin_layout Description
49978 \begin_inset space ~
49981 search Commands that will be used for the menu
49983 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49985 \begin_inset space ~
49991 For a detailed description see section
49993 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49998 \begin_inset space ~
50006 \begin_layout Description
50008 \begin_inset space ~
50011 Options Options for the program
50015 that is used for the export format
50020 \begin_inset space ~
50024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50026 reference "subsec:Export"
50031 Possible options are listed in the
50036 \begin_inset Newline newline
50040 \begin_inset Flex URL
50043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50045 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
50055 \begin_layout Description
50057 \begin_inset space ~
50061 \begin_inset space ~
50064 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
50067 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50068 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
50070 \begin_inset space ~
50076 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
50079 \begin_layout Description
50081 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
50083 \begin_inset space ~
50087 \begin_inset Index idx
50090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50097 \begin_inset Index idx
50100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50101 Settings ! Date format
50106 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
50107 \begin_inset Newline newline
50111 \begin_inset Flex URL
50114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50116 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
50122 \begin_inset Newline newline
50125 For example the format
50126 \begin_inset Newline newline
50130 \begin_inset Newline newline
50133 prints the date as day/month/year.
50138 \begin_layout Description
50140 \begin_inset space ~
50144 \begin_inset space ~
50147 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
50148 is allowed to overwrite on export.
50151 \begin_layout Subsection
50157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50159 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
50164 \begin_inset Index idx
50167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50168 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
50177 \begin_layout Description
50179 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
50181 \begin_inset space ~
50189 \begin_inset space ~
50193 \begin_inset space ~
50196 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
50201 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
50222 are used for Cyrillic.
50223 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
50224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50236 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
50238 sets up in the background.
50239 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
50244 \begin_layout Description
50246 \begin_inset space ~
50250 \begin_inset space ~
50254 \begin_inset space ~
50258 \begin_inset space ~
50261 options They only have an effect when the program
50265 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
50268 \begin_layout Standard
50269 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
50270 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
50271 manuals of the applications.
50274 \begin_layout Description
50276 \begin_inset space ~
50279 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
50280 \begin_inset space ~
50284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50286 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
50293 \begin_layout Description
50295 \begin_inset space ~
50298 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
50299 \begin_inset space ~
50303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50305 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
50312 \begin_layout Description
50314 \begin_inset space ~
50317 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
50318 \begin_inset space ~
50322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50324 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
50331 \begin_layout Description
50337 \begin_inset space ~
50340 command Command for the program
50342 Check\SpecialChar TeX
50345 that is described in the section
50347 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
50352 Additional Features
50357 \begin_layout Standard
50358 There are additionally the following options:
50361 \begin_layout Description
50363 \begin_inset space ~
50367 \begin_inset space ~
50371 \begin_inset space ~
50375 \begin_inset space ~
50380 \begin_inset space ~
50383 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
50384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50401 to separate folders.
50402 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
50404 \begin_inset Index idx
50407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50414 \begin_inset Index idx
50417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50426 \begin_layout Description
50428 \begin_inset space ~
50432 \begin_inset space ~
50436 \begin_inset space ~
50440 \begin_inset space ~
50444 \begin_inset space ~
50448 \begin_inset space ~
50451 changes Removes all manually set
50457 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50458 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50460 \begin_inset space ~
50465 dialog when changing the document class.
50468 \begin_layout Section
50470 \begin_inset space ~
50474 \begin_inset Index idx
50477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50486 \begin_layout Subsection
50488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50490 name "subsec:Converters"
50495 \begin_inset Index idx
50498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50507 \begin_layout Standard
50508 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
50509 from one format to another.
50510 You can modify converters or create new ones.
50511 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
50518 \begin_inset space ~
50523 field and press the
50528 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
50532 \begin_inset space ~
50537 drop-down list, modify the
50541 field and press the
50548 \begin_layout Standard
50551 Converter File Cache
50557 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
50559 Maximum Age (in days
50562 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
50563 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
50566 \begin_layout Standard
50567 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
50568 definition, is described in the section
50579 \begin_layout Subsection
50581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50583 name "sec:File-Formats"
50588 \begin_inset Index idx
50591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50598 \begin_inset Index idx
50601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50610 \begin_layout Standard
50611 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
50621 programs that should be used for certain formats.
50624 \begin_layout Standard
50625 You can also define the
50627 Default output format
50629 that is used when you use
50631 View, Update, View Master Document
50635 Update Master Document
50641 menu or the toolbar.
50644 \begin_layout Standard
50645 More about formats and their options is described in the section
50656 \begin_layout Standard
50657 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
50659 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
50660 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
50661 This is done by specifying a
50666 More about this is described in the section
50677 \begin_layout Chapter
50678 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50680 \begin_inset Index idx
50683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50692 name "chap:Units-available-in"
50699 \begin_layout Standard
50701 \begin_inset space ~
50705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50707 reference "tab:Units"
50711 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50712 and used in this documentation.
50715 \begin_layout Standard
50716 \begin_inset Float table
50723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50724 \begin_inset Caption Standard
50726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50742 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
50748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50750 \begin_inset Tabular
50751 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
50752 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
50753 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50754 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
50755 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50805 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50908 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
50912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51179 scaled point (65536
51180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51247 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
51252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51371 % of original image width
51376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51460 \begin_layout Standard
51461 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
51464 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
51471 \begin_layout Bibliography
51472 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51473 LatexCommand bibitem
51480 The \SpecialChar LyX
51482 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51485 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
51491 \begin_inset Newline newline
51495 \begin_inset Flex URL
51498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51500 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
51508 \begin_layout Bibliography
51509 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51510 LatexCommand bibitem
51511 key "latexcompanion"
51516 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
51518 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
51519 Companion Second Edition.
51522 Addison-Wesley, 2004
51525 \begin_layout Bibliography
51526 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51527 LatexCommand bibitem
51533 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
51536 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
51540 Addison-Wesley, 2003
51543 \begin_layout Bibliography
51544 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51545 LatexCommand bibitem
51554 : A Document Preparation System.
51557 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
51560 \begin_layout Bibliography
51561 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51562 LatexCommand bibitem
51572 The \SpecialChar TeX
51576 Addison-Wesley, 1984
51579 \begin_layout Bibliography
51580 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51581 LatexCommand bibitem
51587 The \SpecialChar TeX
51589 \begin_inset Newline newline
51593 \begin_inset Flex URL
51596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51598 https://ctan.org/topic
51606 \begin_layout Bibliography
51607 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51608 LatexCommand bibitem
51614 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
51616 \begin_inset Newline newline
51620 \begin_inset Flex URL
51623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51625 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
51633 \begin_layout Bibliography
51634 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51635 LatexCommand bibitem
51642 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51644 name "Documentation"
51645 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
51652 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51656 \begin_inset Newline newline
51660 \begin_inset Flex URL
51663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51665 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
51673 \begin_layout Bibliography
51674 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51675 LatexCommand bibitem
51682 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51684 name "Documentation"
51685 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
51690 how to use the program
51692 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51696 \begin_inset Newline newline
51700 \begin_inset Flex URL
51703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51705 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
51713 \begin_layout Bibliography
51714 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51715 LatexCommand bibitem
51722 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51724 name "Documentation"
51725 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
51730 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51736 \begin_inset Index idx
51739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51741 packages ! biblatex
51747 \begin_inset Newline newline
51751 \begin_inset Flex URL
51754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51756 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
51764 \begin_layout Bibliography
51765 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51766 LatexCommand bibitem
51773 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51775 name "Documentation"
51776 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
51781 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51787 \begin_inset Index idx
51790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51798 \begin_inset Newline newline
51802 \begin_inset Flex URL
51805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51807 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
51815 \begin_layout Bibliography
51816 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51817 LatexCommand bibitem
51824 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51826 name "Documentation"
51827 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
51837 \begin_inset Newline newline
51841 \begin_inset Flex URL
51844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51846 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
51854 \begin_layout Bibliography
51855 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51856 LatexCommand bibitem
51857 key "makeindex-man"
51863 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51866 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
51876 \begin_inset Newline newline
51880 \begin_inset Flex URL
51883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51885 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
51893 \begin_layout Bibliography
51894 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51895 LatexCommand bibitem
51902 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51904 name "Documentation"
51905 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
51915 \begin_inset Newline newline
51919 \begin_inset Flex URL
51922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51924 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
51932 \begin_layout Bibliography
51933 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51934 LatexCommand bibitem
51941 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51943 name "Documentation"
51944 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
51949 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
51951 \begin_inset Newline newline
51955 \begin_inset Flex URL
51958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51960 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
51968 \begin_layout Bibliography
51969 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51970 LatexCommand bibitem
51977 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51979 name "Documentation"
51980 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
51985 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51991 \begin_inset Index idx
51994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52002 \begin_inset Newline newline
52006 \begin_inset Flex URL
52009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52011 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
52019 \begin_layout Bibliography
52020 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52021 LatexCommand bibitem
52028 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52030 name "Documentation"
52031 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
52036 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52042 \begin_inset Index idx
52045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52047 packages ! enumitem
52053 \begin_inset Newline newline
52057 \begin_inset Flex URL
52060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52062 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
52070 \begin_layout Bibliography
52071 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52072 LatexCommand bibitem
52079 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52081 name "Documentation"
52082 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
52087 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52093 \begin_inset Index idx
52096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52098 packages ! fancyhdr
52104 \begin_inset Newline newline
52108 \begin_inset Flex URL
52111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52113 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
52121 \begin_layout Bibliography
52122 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52123 LatexCommand bibitem
52130 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52132 name "Documentation"
52133 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
52138 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52144 \begin_inset Index idx
52147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52149 packages ! hyperref
52155 \begin_inset Newline newline
52159 \begin_inset Flex URL
52162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52164 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
52172 \begin_layout Bibliography
52173 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52174 LatexCommand bibitem
52181 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52183 name "Documentation"
52184 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
52189 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52195 \begin_inset Index idx
52198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52200 packages ! microtpye
52206 \begin_inset Newline newline
52210 \begin_inset Flex URL
52213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52215 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
52223 \begin_layout Bibliography
52224 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52225 LatexCommand bibitem
52232 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52234 name "Documentation"
52235 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
52240 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52246 \begin_inset Index idx
52249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52257 \begin_inset Newline newline
52261 \begin_inset Flex URL
52264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52266 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
52274 \begin_layout Bibliography
52275 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52276 LatexCommand bibitem
52283 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52285 name "Documentation"
52286 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
52291 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52297 \begin_inset Index idx
52300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52302 packages ! prettyref
52308 \begin_inset Newline newline
52312 \begin_inset Flex URL
52315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52317 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
52325 \begin_layout Bibliography
52326 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52327 LatexCommand bibitem
52334 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52336 name "Documentation"
52337 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
52342 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52348 \begin_inset Index idx
52351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52353 packages ! refstyle
52359 \begin_inset Newline newline
52363 \begin_inset Flex URL
52366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52368 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
52376 \begin_layout Bibliography
52377 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52378 LatexCommand bibitem
52385 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52388 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
52393 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52395 \begin_inset Newline newline
52399 \begin_inset Flex URL
52402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52404 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
52412 \begin_layout Bibliography
52413 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52414 LatexCommand bibitem
52421 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52424 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
52429 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52431 \begin_inset Newline newline
52435 \begin_inset Flex URL
52438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52440 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
52448 \begin_layout Bibliography
52449 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52450 LatexCommand bibitem
52457 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52460 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
52465 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52466 for Cyrillic languages:
52467 \begin_inset Newline newline
52471 \begin_inset Flex URL
52474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52476 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
52484 \begin_layout Bibliography
52485 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52486 LatexCommand bibitem
52493 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52496 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
52501 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52503 \begin_inset Newline newline
52507 \begin_inset Flex URL
52510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52512 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
52520 \begin_layout Bibliography
52521 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52522 LatexCommand bibitem
52529 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52532 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
52537 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52539 \begin_inset Newline newline
52543 \begin_inset Flex URL
52546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52548 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
52556 \begin_layout Bibliography
52557 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52558 LatexCommand bibitem
52565 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52568 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
52573 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
52575 \begin_inset Newline newline
52579 \begin_inset Flex URL
52582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52584 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
52592 \begin_layout Standard
52593 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52627 \begin_inset Note Note
52630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52637 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
52638 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
52639 bibliography is the second one:
52647 \begin_layout Standard
52648 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
52649 LatexCommand bibtex
52650 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
52651 options "biblio/alphadin"
52658 \begin_layout Standard
52659 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52663 \begin_layout Standard
52667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52673 pagedeclaration}[1]{
52676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52682 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
52690 \begin_inset Note Note
52693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52694 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
52695 \begin_inset space ~
52699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52701 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
52713 \begin_layout Standard
52714 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
52715 LatexCommand printnomenclature
52721 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
52722 LatexCommand printindex